Comentário do capítulo
Daniel Capítulo 7
서론
Daniel 7 Introduction
日本語
Original em inglês
Section I.-- Analysis of the Chapter
This chapter contains an account of a remarkable prophetic dream which Daniel had in the first year of the reign of Belshazzar, and of the interpretation of the dream. After a brief statement of the contents of the chapter, it will be proper, in order to its more clear exposition, to state the different methods which have been proposed for interpreting it, or the different views of its application which have been adopted. The chapter comprises the following main points: the vision, Daniel 7:1-14; and the explanation, Daniel 7:15-28.
I. The vision, Daniel 7:1-14. The dream occurred in the first year of the reign of Belshazzar, and was immediately written out. Daniel is represented as standing near the sea, and a violent wind rages upon the sea, tossing the waves in wild commotion. Suddenly he sees four monsters emerge from the agitated waves, each one apparently remaining for a little time, and then disappearing. The first, in its general form, resembled a lion, but had wings like an eagle. On this he attentively gazed, until the wings were plucked away, and the beast was made to stand upright as a man, and the heart of a man was given to it.
Nothing is said as to what became of the beast after this. Then there appeared a second beast, resembling a bear, raising itself up on one side, and having three ribs in its mouth, and a command was given to it to arise and devour much flesh. Nothing is said further of what became of this beast. Then there arose another beast like a leopard, with four wings, and four heads, and to this beast was given wide dominion. Nothing is said as to what became of this animal. Then there arose a fourth beast more remarkable still. Its form is not mentioned, but it was fierce and strong. It had great iron teeth. It trampled down everything before it, and devoured and brake in pieces. This beast had at first ten horns, but soon there sprang up in the midst of them another - a smaller horn at first, but as this increased three of the ten horns were plucked up by the roots - apparently either by this, or in order to give place to it. What was more remarkable still, in this smaller horn there appeared the eyes of a man - emblematic of intelligence and vigilance; and a mouth speaking great things - indicative of pride and arrogance. Daniel looked on this singular vision until a throne was set up or established, and then the Ancient of days did sit - until the old forms of dominations ceased, and the reign of God was introduced and established. He contemplated it until, on account of the great words which the "horn spake," the beast was slain, and his body was destroyed, and given to the burning flame. In the meantime the dominion was taken away from the other beasts; though their existence was prolonged for a little time. Then appeared in vision one in the form of man, who came to the Ancient of days, and there was given to him universal dominion over all people a kingdom that should never be destroyed.
II. The interpretation of the vision Daniel 7:15-28. Daniel was greatly troubled at the vision which he had seen, and he approached one who stood near, and asked him the meaning of it, Daniel 7:15-16. The explanation with which he was favored was, in general, the following: That those four beasts which he had seen represented four kings or kingdoms which would exist on the earth, and that the great design of the vision was to state the fact that the saints of tho Most High would ultimately possess the kingdom, and would reign forever, Daniel 7:17-18. The grand purpose of the vision was to represent the succession of dynasties, and the particular character of each one, until the government over the world should pass into the hands of the people of God, or until the actual rule on the earth should be in the hands of the righteous. The ultimate object, the thing to which all revolutions tended, and which was designed to be indicated in the vision, was the final reign of the saints on the earth. There was to be a time when the kingdom under the whole heaven was to be given to the people of the saints of the Most High; or, in other words, there would be a state of things on the earth, when "all dominions," or all "rulers" (margin, Daniel 7:27), would obey him. This general announcement in reference to the ultimate thing contemplated, and to the three first kingdoms, represented by the three first beasts, was satisfactory to Daniel, but he was still perplexed in regard to the particular thing designed to be represented by the fourth beast, so remarkable in its structure, so unlike all the others, and undergoing so surprising a transformation, Daniel 7:19-22. The sum of what was stated to him, in regard to the events represented by the fourth beast, is as follows:
(1) That this was designed to represent a fourth kingdom or dynasty which would arise upon the earth, in many respects, different from the three which would precede it. It was to be a kingdom which would be distinguished for oppressive conquests. It would subdue the whole earth, and it would crush, and prostrate, and trample down those whom it invaded. The description would characterize a dominion that would be stern, and mighty, and cruel, and successful; that would keep the nations which it subdued under its control by the terror of arms rather than by the administration of just laws; Daniel 7:23.
(2) The ten horns that Daniel saw spring out of its head denoted ten kings that would arise, or a succession of rulers that would sway the authority of the kingdom, Daniel 7:24.
(3) The other horn that sprang up among the ten, and after them, denoted another dynasty that would arise, and this would have peculiar characteristics. It would so far have connection with the former that it would spring out of them. But in most important respects it would differ from them. Its characteristics may be summed up as follows:
(a) It would spring from their midst, or be somehow attached, or connected with them - as the horn sprang from the head of the beast - and this would properly denote that the new power somehow sprang from the dynasty denoted by the fourth beast - as the horn sprang from the head of that beast;
(b) though springing from that, it would be "diverse" from it, having a character to be determined, not from the mere fact of its origin, but from something else.
(c) It would "subdue three of these kings;" that is, it would evercome and prostrate a certain portion of the power and authority denoted by the ten horns perhaps meaning that it would usurp something like one-third of the power of the kingdom denoted by the fourth beast.
(d) It would be characterized by arrogance and haughtiness - so much so that the fair construction of its claims would be that of "speaking against the Most High."
(e) It would "wear out the saints of the Most High" - evidently referring to persecution.
(f) It would claim legislative authority so as to "change times and laws" - clearly referring to some claim set up over established laws, or to unusual authority, Daniel 7:24-25.
(4) Into the hand of this new power, all these things would be given for "a time, and times, and half a time:" implying that it would not be permanent, but would come to an end, Daniel 7:25.
(5) After that there would be a judgment - a judicial determination in regard to this new power, and the dominion would be taken away, to be utterly destroyed, Daniel 7:26.
(6) There would come a period when the whole dominion of the earth would pass into the hands of the saints; or, in other words, there would be a universal reign of the principles of truth and righteousness, Daniel 7:27.
In the conclusion of the chapter Daniel 7:28, Daniel says that these communications deeply affected his heart. He had been permitted to look far into futurity, and to contemplate vast changes in the progress of human affairs, and even to look forward to a period when all the nations would be brought under the dominion of the law of God, and the friends of the Most High would be put in possession of all power. Such events were fitted to fill the mind with solemn thought, and it is not wonderful that he contemplated them with deep emotion.
Section II.-- Various Methods of Interpreting This Chapter
It is hardly necessary to say that there have been very different methods of interpreting this chapter, and that the views of its proper interpretation are by no means agreed on by expositors. It may be useful to refer to some of those methods before we advance to its exposition, that they may be before the mind in its consideration. We shall be the better able to ascertain what is the true interpretation by inquiring which of them, if any, accords with the fair exposition of the language employed by the sacred writer. The opinions entertained may be reduced to the following classes:
I. Hardt supposes that the four beasts here denote four particular kings - Nebuchadnezzar, Evil-Merodach, Belshazzar, and Cyrus.
II. Ephraem, who is followed by Eichhorn, supposes that the first beast referred to the Babylonian-Chaldean kingdom; the second, the Medish empire under Cyaxares II, the three "ribs" of which denote the Medish, Persian, and Chaldean portions of that empire; the third, the Persian empire, the four heads and wings of which denote the spread of the Persian empire toward the four regions under heaven, or to all parts of the world; the fourth, to the Grecian empire under Alexander and his successors, the ten horns of which denote ten eminent kings among the successors of Alexander, and the "little horn," that sprang up among them, Antiochus Epiphanes. The succeeding state of things, according to Ephraem and Eichhorn, refers to the kingdom of the Messiah.
III. Grotius, representing another class of interpreters, whom Hetzel follows, supposes that the succession of the kingdoms here referred to is the Babylonian-Chaldean; the Persian; the kingdom of Alexander, and his successors. The fifth is the Roman empire.
IV. The most common interpretation which has prevailed in the church is what supposes that the first beast denotes the Chaldean kingdom; the second, the Medo-Persian; the third, the Greek empire under Alexander and his successors; the fourth, the Roman empire. The dominion of the saints is the reign of the Messiah and his laws. But this opinion, particularly as far as pertains to the fourth and fifth of these kingdoms, has had a great variety of modifications, especially in reference to the signification of the ten horns, and the little horn that sprang up among them. Some who, under the fifth kingdom, suppose that the reign of Christ is referred to, regard the fourth kingdom as relating to Rome under the Caesars, and that the ten horns refer to a succession of ten regents, and the little horn to Julius Caesar. Others, who refer the last empire to the personal reign of Christ on the earth, and the kingdom which he would set up, suppose that the ten horns refer to ten kings or dynasties that sprang out of the Roman power - either a succession of the emperors, or those who came in after the invasion of the northern hordes, or certain kingdoms of Europe which succeeded the Roman power after it fell; and by the little horn, they suppose that either the Turkish power with its various branches is designated, or Mahomet, or the Papacy, or Anti-christ.
V. The Jews, in general, suppose that the fifth kingdom refers to the reign of the Messiah; but still there has been great diversity of views among them in regard to the application of particular parts of the prophecy. Many of the older interpreters among them supposed that the ten horns denoted ten Roman Caesars, and that the last horn referred to Titus Vespasian. Most of the later Jewish interpreters refer this to their fabulous Gog and Magog.
VI. Another interpretation which has had its advocates is what supposes that the first kingdom was the Chaldean; the second, the Persian; the third, that of Alexander; the fourth, that of his successors; and the fifth, that of the Asmonean princes who rose up to deliver the Jewish nation from the despotism of the Syrian kings.
VII. As a specimen of one mode of interpretation which has prevailed to some extent in the church, the opinion of Cocceius may be referred to. He supposes that the first beast, with the eagle's wings, denoted the reign of the Christian emperors in Rome, and the spread of Christianity under them into remote regions of the East and West; the second, with the three ribs in his mouth, the Arian Goths, Vandals, and Lombards; the third, with the four heads and four wings, the Mahometan kingdom with the four Caliphates; the fourth, the kingdom of Charlemagne, and the ten horns in this kingdom, the Carlovingians, Saxons, Salle, Swedish, Hollandish, English, etc., princes and dynasties or people; and the little horn, the Papacy as the actual Anti-christ.
The statement of these various opinions, and methods of interpretation, I have translated from Bertholdt, Daniel, pp. 419-426. To these should be added the opinion which Bertholdt himself maintains, and which has been held by many others, and which Bertholdt has explained and defended at length, pp. 426-446. That opinion is, substantially, that the first kingdom is the Babylonian kingdom under Nebuchadnezzar, and that the wings of the first beast denote the extended spread of that empire. The second beast, with the three "ribs," or fangs, denotes the Median, Lydian, and Babylonian kingdoms, which were erected under one scepter, the Persian. The third beast, with the four wings and four heads, denotes the Grecian dynasty under Alexander, and the spread of that kingdom throughout the four parts of the world. The fourth beast denotes the kingdom of the Lagidae and Seleucidae, under which the Hebrews suffered so much. The statement respecting this kingdom Daniel 7:7, that "it was diverse from all that went before it," refers to the "plurality of the fourth kingdom." or the fact that it was an aggregate made up of many others - a kingdom in a collective sense. The "ten horns" denote ten successive princes or kings in that kingdom, and Bertholdt enumerates them in the following order:
-
Seleucus Nicator;
-
Antiochus Soter;
-
Antiochus Theos;
-
Seleucus Kallinicus;
-
Seleucus Keraunus;
-
Antiochus the Great;
-
Seleucus Philopater;
-
Heliodorus;
-
Ptolemy Philometer;
-
Demetrius.
The eleventh - denoted by the little horn - was Antiochus Epiphanes, who brought so many calamitities upon the Hebrew people. His reign lasted, according to Bertholdt, "a time, and times, and half a time" - or three years and a half; and then the kingdom was restored to the people of God to be a permanent reign, and, ultimately, under the Messiah, to fill the world and endure to the end of time.
The interpretation thus stated, supposing that the "little horn" refers to Antiochus Epiphanes, is also maintained by Prof. Stuart. - Hints on Prophecy, 2nd ed., pp. 85-98. Compare also Commentary on Daniel, pp. 173-194, and 205-211.
Amidst such a variety of views, the only hope of arriving at any satisfactory conclusion respecting the meaning of this chapter is by a careful examination of the text, and the fair meaning of the symbols employed by Daniel.
1
Daniel 7:1
日本語
バビロンの王ベルシャザルの第一年に——ベルシャザルの人物と統治については、ダニエル書第五章序論第2節を見よ。彼はバビロンの最後の王であり、この事実は、この夢において明かされた事柄にいくらかの光を投じうるであろう。
ダニエルは夢を見た——欄外注では、ヘブル語に従って「見た」となっている。彼は眠っているときに、幻の中で一連の出来事を見たのである。「夢」とはその表象を指し、それは、彼がそれを見たかのように語ることがふさわしい性質のものであった。(Daniel 2:1) の注解と比較されたい。
彼の寝床の上で、彼の頭の中の幻——(Daniel 4:5) の注解を見よ。
そこで彼はその夢を書き記した——彼はその時点でそれを記録に残した。彼はそれを伝承にゆだねることも、成就を待ってから記録することもせず、言及された出来事が起こるはるか前に、その予告を書き物として残した。それは、預言が成就したとき、人々がそれを出来事と比較しうるようにするためであった。夢においてであれ、幻においてであれ、また言葉によって彼らに伝えられるものであれ、自分たちの予告を記録することは、預言者たちの間の慣習であった。それは、出来事が起こったとき、それについての霊感による予告が先行して存在したことを疑いようがないようにし、また予告と出来事とを注意深く比較する機会を設けるためであった。預言者たちはしばしば、自分たちの予告を記録するよう命じられている。(Isaiah 8:1, Isaiah 8:16; Isaiah 30:8; Habakkuk 2:2) を見よ。(Revelation 1:19; Revelation 14:13; Revelation 21:5) と比較されたい。ここにある場合と同様に、多くの実例において、記録は出来事の数百年前に作成された。そして、その記録が出来事に合わせて改変されていないということについて、そのような場合にありうる限りの証拠がすべてあるのであり、それゆえここに、預言者たちの霊感に関する最も高い証明が提供されている。ここでの意味は、ダニエルが夢を見るとすぐにそれを書き記した、ということである。
そしてその事柄の大意を告げた——カルデヤ語では「言葉の頭を語った」となる。すなわち、彼はそれを書き記すことによって語り、告げたのである。彼はこのような仕方で、それらを世に伝えたのである。だれかに口頭で伝えたという含意ではなく、指定された仕方で——すなわち書き記すことによって——伝えたということである。ここで「大意」と訳されている語——ראשׁ(rē'sh)——は「頭」を意味し、内容をまとめ上げる記録、すなわち要約——書物の内容を簡潔に述べるもの、あるいは詳細に入ることなく物事の主要な点を述べるもの——を適切に表すものであろう。ここでの意味は、彼が名前や日付や場所を書き記すような仕方で詳細に入らなかったということ、あるいはおそらくは、海から上がって来た獣たちについて見たすべてのことを綿密に描写するのではなく、特異なもの、特別な意義を持つものと考えられうるものを記録した、ということであると思われる。
キシアヌス写本はこれを、ἔγραψεν ἐις κεφάλαια λόγων(egrapsen eis kephalaia logōn)——「彼は言葉の標題のもとに書き記した」、すなわちそれを要約された描写にまとめた——と訳している。レンガーケはこの箇所について、預言者たちは、後の時代に暴君たちに臨む事柄を描写するとき、比較的暗く曖昧な仕方で神託を伝えたが、それは出来事が起こった後には明らかになるようなものであった、と適切に指摘している。この理由は明白である。多くの予告の意味が、それが指す当人たちによって理解されていたならば、その事実は彼らにとってそれを阻止しようとする動機となったであろう。そして成就が彼らの自発的な行為に依存していたのであれば、予告は無効となったであろう。それゆえ一般に、直接的な予告や、名前、日付、場所の言及を避け、予告がなされた時点ではその意味が曖昧であるが、出来事が起こるときには明らかとなるような象徴を用いることが必要であった。(Daniel 7:4, Daniel 7:9, Daniel 7:11, Daniel 7:14) を比較すれば、起こるべき事柄の要約だけが記録されたことが分かるであろう。
事柄——欄外注では、カルデヤ語に従って「言葉」となっている。しかし「言葉」という術語は、しばしば物事を表すのにも用いられる。
Original em inglês
In the first year of Belshazzar king of Babylon - On the character and reign of Belshazzar, see Introduction to Daniel 5 Section II. He was the last of the kings of Babylon, and this fact may cast some light on the disclosures made in the dream.
Daniel had a dream - Margin, as in Hebrew, saw. He saw a series of events in vision when he was asleep. The dream refers to that representation, and was of such a nature that it was proper to speak of it as if he saw it. Compare the notes at Daniel 2:1.
And visions of his head upon his bed - See the notes at Daniel 4:5.
Then he wrote the dream - He made a record of it at the time. He did not commit it to tradition, or wait for its fulfillment before it was recorded, but long before the events referred to occurred he committed the prediction to writing, that when the prophecy was fulfilled they might be compared with it. It was customary among the prophets to record their predictions, whether communicated in a dream, in a vision, or by words to them, that there might be no doubt when the event occurred that there had been an inspired prediction of it, and that there might be an opportunity of a careful comparison of the prediction with the event. Often the prophets were commanded to record their predictions. See Isaiah 8:1, Isaiah 8:16; Isaiah 30:8; Habakkuk 2:2. Compare Revelation 1:19; Revelation 14:13; Revelation 21:5. In many instances, as in the case before us, the record was made hundreds of years before the event occurred, and as there is all the evidence that there could be in a case that the record has not been altered to adapt it to the event, the highest proof is thus furnished of the inspiration of the prophets. The meaning here is, that Daniel wrote out the dream as soon as it occurred.
And told the sum of the matters - Chaldee, "And spake the head of the words." That is, he spake or told them by writing. He made a communication of them in this manner to the world. It is not implied that he made any oral communication of them to anyone, but that he communicated them - to wit, in the way specified. The word "sum" here - ראשׁ rē'sh - means "head"; and would properly denote such a record as would be a heading up, or a summary - as stating in a brief way the contents of a book, or the chief points of a thing without going into detail. The meaning here seems to be that he did not go into detail - as by writing names, and dates, and places; or, perhaps, that he did not enter into a minute description of all that he saw in regard to the beasts that came up from the sea, but that he recorded what might be considered as peculiar, and as having special significancy.
The Codex Chisianus renders this, ἔγραψεν ἐις κεφάλαια λόγων egrapsen eis kephalaia logōn - "He wrote in heads of words," that is, he reduced it to a summary description. It is well remarked by Lengerke, on this place, that the prophets, when they described what was to occur to tyrants in future times, conveyed their oracles in a comparatively dark and obscure manner, yet so as to be clear when the events should occur. The reason of this is obvious. If the meaning of many of the predictions had been understood by those to whom they referred, that fact would have been a motive to them to induce them to defeat them; and as the fulfillment depended on their voluntary agency, the prophecy would have been void. It was necessary, therefore, in general, to avoid direct predictions, and the mention of names, dates, and places, and to make use of symbols whose meaning would be obscure at the time when the prediction was made, but which would be plain when the event should occur. A comparison of Daniel 7:4, Daniel 7:9, Daniel 7:11, Daniel 7:14, will show that only a sumptuary of what was to occur was recorded.
Matters - Margin, as in Chaldee, words. The term words, however; is often used to denote things.
2
Daniel 7:2
日本語
ダニエルは語って言った——すなわち、前の節で示された仕方で語り、述べたという意味である。それは当時になされた記録によって語られたのであり、それゆえ彼は、自分の同時代の人々と未来のすべての時代に向かって語る者であると言うことができたのである。
私が夜の幻の中で見ると——幻の中で私が見た、という意味である。すなわち、彼がこれから描写しようとする光景が、彼に表として示されるのを彼は見たのである。彼は、嵐の中の海と、そこから上がって来るこれらの怪獣たちと、それに続く奇妙な一連のできごととを、見ているかのように思われたのである。
見よ、天の四つの風が——天の下に吹く風、あるいは天すなわち大空から来るように見える風々のことである。(Jeremiah 49:36) と比較せよ。ここで風の数が四つとされているのは、今日と同じく、風が主として地の四方から吹くからである。風を東風、南風、西風、北風としてこの仕方で呼ぶことよりも普通のことが、今もない。ラテン人たちも同様である——エウルス(Eurus)、アウステル(Auster)、ゼフィルス(Zephyrus)、ボレアス(Boreas)。
激しく吹き荒れた——מגיחן(megı̂ychân)。破れ出る、あるいは突き進むという意味であり、互いに衝突するかのように見えた。風々は四方から破れ出て突き進み、海の上で出会うかのように見えて、海を激しく揺り動かした。ヘブル語(גיח gı̂yach)は、泉や水の流れが破れ出ることを意味し (Job 40:23)、胎から破れ出る幼子についても (Job 38:8)、戦いに突き進む戦士についても用いられる (Ezekiel 32:2)。それゆえ、これに対応するカルデヤ語は、破れ出る、風のように突き出ることを意味する。ここにある象徴は、天の風々が混乱の中で共に突き進むかのように、諸国民の間に起こるある激しい動揺を自然に表すものであろう。
大いなる海の上に——この表現は、いかなる大海や大洋にも適切に当てはまるが、ダニエルの思いに浮かんだのは、彼とその同時代人たちに最もよく知られていた、あの地中海であった可能性が高い。大きくうねる大洋、あるいは嵐に揺り動かされる大洋は、内紛によって動揺する一民族ないし諸民族、革命の渦中にある諸民族を表す自然の象徴となり得る。聖なる詩人たちと預言者たちの間では、ある地に侵入する軍勢の群れはあふれる水にたとえられ、諸国民の間の大いなる変化は嵐の中でうねる大洋の波にたとえられる。(Jeremiah 46:7-8; Jeremiah 47:2; Isaiah 8:7-8; Isaiah 17:12; Isaiah 59:19; Daniel 11:40; Revelation 13:1) と比較せよ。古典に親しんだ読者は、ここの描写によって、ウェルギリウス『アエネーイス』第一巻82行以下の言葉を思い出すであろう。
「Ac venti, velut agmine facto
Qua data porta ruunt, et terras turbine perflant.
Incubuere mari, totumque a sedibus imis
Una Eurusque, Notusque ruunt, creberquc procellis.
Africus, et vastos volvunt ad littora fluctus.」
——そして風々は、まるで隊列を組んだかのように、開かれた門から一斉に突き進み、旋風をもって地々を吹き払う。彼らは海に襲いかかり、エウルスとノトゥスが一つとなって海底から全海をひっくり返し、暴風の絶えないアフリクスもまた、巨大な波を岸辺へと転がし寄せる。——
オウィディウス『トリスティア』第一巻2歌25行以下も比較せよ。ダニエルが見た獣たち、すなわち相次ぐ王国を表す獣たちが立ち上って来たのは、この激動する海からであるように見えた。この象徴のこの部分の公正な解釈は、ダニエルの幻に現れたとおり、嵐に駆り立てられる海に似た動揺が諸国民の間に存在した、あるいは存在するであろうこと、そしてその動揺から、四つの獣の姿が示す特徴を持つ王国たちが相次いで立ち上がるであろう、ということである。私たちはこの成就を探すにあたり、自然に、諸国民が動揺し激動し、風々が海の上で争ったように互いに争った状態——すなわち、これら四つの相次ぐ王国の興起に先行した状態——に目を向けることになる。今その時がここで意味された時代であったかどうかを決定しようとはしないが、ここで述べられているすべてのことに対応するものが、ネブカデネザルの治世、あるいは彼が建てて栄光を与えた王国の直前の時期に見出されることは確かである。彼の迅速かつ広範な征服、自衛における諸国民の動揺、そして彼らの互いに対する戦争は、ダニエルが幻の中で見た大洋の動揺によってよく表されるであろう。この像が当てはまり得る世界史上の他の時期も多くあったことは確かであるが、それがこの時期に当てはまることはだれも疑うことができない。そして、ネブカデネザルの王国に始まる一連の王国たちを表すことが目的であったならば、それで十分であったであろう。
Original em inglês
Daniel spake and said - That is, he spake and said in the manner intimated in the previous verse. It was by a record made at the time, and thus he might be said to speak to his own generation and to all future times.
I saw in my vision by night - I beheld in the vision; that is, he saw represented to him the scene which he proceeds to describe. He seemed to see the sea in a tempest, and these monsters come up from it, and the strange succession of events which followed.
And behold, the four winds of the heaven - The winds that blow under the heaven, or that seem to come from the heaven - or the air. Compare Jeremiah 49:36. The number of the winds is here referred to as four as they are now, as blowing mainly from the four quarters of the earth. Nothing is more common now than to designate them in this manner - as the east, the south, the west, the north wind. So the Latins - Eurus, Auster, Zephyrus, Boreas.
Strove - מגיחן megı̂ychân. Burst, or rushed forth; seemed to conflict together. The winds burst, rushed from all quarters, and seemed to meet on the sea, throwing it into wild commotion. The Hebrew word (גיח gı̂yach) means to break or burst forth, as a fountain or stream of waters, Job 40:23; an infant breaking forth from the womb, Job 38:8; a warrior rushing forth to battle, Ezekiel 32:2. Hence, the Chaldean to break forth; to rush forth as the winds. The symbol here would naturally denote some wild commotion among the nations, as if the winds of heaven should rush together in confusion.
Upon the great sea - This expression would properly apply to any great sea or ocean, but it is probable that the one that would occur to Daniel would be the Mediterranean Sea, as that was best known to him and his contemporaries. A heaving ocean - or an ocean tossed with storms - would be a natural emblem to denote a nation, or nations, agitated with internal conflicts, or nations in the midst of revolutions. Among the sacred poets and the prophets, hosts of armies invading a land are compared to overflowing waters, and mighty changes among the nations to the heaving billows of the ocean in a storm. Compare Jeremiah 46:7-8; Jeremiah 47:2; Isaiah 8:7-8; Isaiah 17:12; Isaiah 59:19; Daniel 11:40; Revelation 13:1. The classic reader will be reminded in the description here of the words of Virgil, AEn. I. 82, following:
"Ac venti, velut agmine facto
Qua data porta ruunt, et terras turbine perflant.
Incubuere mari, totumque a sedibus imis
Una Eurusque, Notusque ruunt, creberquc procellis.
Africus, et vastos volvunt ad littora fluctus."
Compare also Ovid, Trist. I. 2, 25, following. It was from this agitated sea that the beasts that Daniel saw, representing successive kingdoms, seemed to rise; and the fair interpretation of this part of the symbol is, that there was, or would be, as it appeared in vision to Daniel, commotions among the nations resembling the sea driven by storms, and that from these commotions there would arise successive kingdoms having the characteristics specified by the appearance of the four beasts. We naturally look, in the fulfillment of this, to some state of things in which the nations were agitated and convulsed; in which they struggled against each other, as the winds strove upon the sea; a state of things which preceded the rise of these four successive kingdoms. Without now pretending to determine whether that was the time denoted by this, it is certain that all that is here said would find a counterpart in the period which immediately preceded the reign of Nebuchadnezzar, or the kingdom which he founded and adorned. His rapid and extensive conquests; the agitation of the nations in self-defense, and their wars against one another, would be well denoted by the agitation of the ocean as seen in vision by Daniel. It is true that there have been many other periods of the world to which the image would be applicable, but no one can doubt that it was applicable to this period, and that would be all that would be necessary if the design was to represent a series of kingdoms commencing with that of Nebuchadnezzar.
3
Daniel 7:3
日本語
四つの大きな獣が海から上がって来た——一度にではなく、順次にである。以下の諸節を見よ。それらの特定の形は、後続の諸節において描写される。ここで彼らが海から上がって来ると述べられている趣旨は、王国のこの継起が、湧き立つ大海によって象徴された諸国民の間の動揺と激変とから生じたことを示すことにあったと思われる。預言者たちが王国や国民を表すしるしとして獣を用いることは珍しくない。通常、象徴される土地に何らかの仕方で固有のものであるか、あるいはそこに豊かに棲息する何らかの獣によってである。こうして (Isaiah 27:1) では、リヴィヤタン、すなわち竜あるいは鰐が、バビロンを表すために用いられている。その箇所の注釈を見よ。(Ezekiel 29:3-5) では、竜あるいはナイルの鰐がパロの代わりに置かれ、(Ezekiel 32:2) では、パロが若い獅子と海の鯨にたとえられている。(Psalm 74:13-14) では、エジプト王国が竜とリヴィヤタンにたとえられる。
同様に古代の貨幣においても、獣はしばしば王国の紋章として用いられている。付け加えれば、今日、獅子とユニコーンがグレートブリテンを、鷲がアメリカ合衆国を表していることもそうである。レンガーケがその箇所で適切に指摘しているように、預言者たちが、他の王国から成る王国、あるいは征服によって他者の権力の下に組み込まれることで結合した王国を表そうとするとき、彼らは自然界に実際に見出される何らかの単一の獣によってではなく、怪物たち——異なる獣たちの特有の性質が一つに集められた複合的な空想上の存在——によってこれを行うのである。鷲の翼を持つ獅子の場合がそうである。こうして (Revelation 13:1) では、ローマ教会の勢力が、七つの頭と十の角を持って海から上がって来る獣によって表されている。エズラ二書(外典)11:1 と比較せよ。そこでは、羽を持つ十二の翼と三つの頭を備えた鷲が、海から来るものとして表されている。預言者たちを模倣しようとする外典の著作における試みの一例として、エズラ二書の第11章と第12章の全体を挙げることができる。
互いにそれぞれ異なっていた——彼らはみな同じ淵から上がって来たが、それでも互いに異なっていた。これは、ここで言及されている継起的な王国が、激しく動揺する海によって象徴された諸国民の中からすべて興るであろうが、重要な点においては互いに異なるであろうことを、疑いなく示している。
Original em inglês
And four great beasts came up from the sea - Not at once, but in succession. See the following verses. Their particular form is described in the subsequent verses. The design of mentioning them here, as coming up from, the sea, seems to have been to show that this succession of kingdoms sprang from the agitations and commotions among the nations represented by the heaving ocean. It is not uncommon for the prophets to make use of animals to represent or symbolize kingdoms and nations - usually by some animal which was in a manner peculiar to the land that was symbolized, or which abounded there. Thus in Isaiah 27:1, leviathan, or the dragon, or crocodile, is used to represent Babylon. See the note at that passage. In Ezekiel 29:3-5, the dragon or the crocodile of the Nile is put for Pharaoh; in Ezekiel 32:2, Pharaoh is compared to a young lion, and to a whale in the seas. In Psalm 74:13-14, the kingdom of Egypt is compared to the dragon and the leviathan.
So on ancient coins, animals are often used as emblems of kingdoms, as it may be added, the lion and the unicorn represent Great Britain now, and the eagle the United States. It is well remarked by Lengerke (in loc.), that when the prophets design to represent kingdoms that are made up of other kingdoms, or that are combined by being brought by conquest under the power of others, they do this, not by any single animal as actually found in nature, but by monsters - fabulous beings that are compounded of others, in which the peculiar qualities of different animals are brought together - as in the case of the lion with eagle's wings. Thus in Revelation 13:1, the Romish power is represented by a beast coming out of the sea, having seven heads and ten horns, Compare it. Ezra (Apocry.) 11:1, where an eagle is represented as coming from the sea with twelve feathered wings and three heads. As an illustration of the attempts made in the apocryphal writings to imitate the prophets, the whole of chapter 11 and chapter 12 of the second book of Ezra may be referred to.
Diverse one from another - Though they all came up from the same abyss, yet they differed from each other - denoting, doubtless, that though the successive kingdoms referred to would all rise out of the nations represented by the agitated sea, yet that in important respects they would differ from each other.
4
Daniel 7:4
日本語
第一のものは獅子のようであった——これらのしるしを解き、適用するにあたっては、それらが意味を持つということを前提としなければならない。すなわち、ここに言及された諸王国を表すためにこれらのしるしが用いられたことには、適切さあるいは妥当性があり、それぞれの場合に、他の獣ではなく特定の獣がしるしとして選ばれた理由があったということである。言い換えれば、熊や豹よりも獅子に、当の王国を象徴するのに適した何かがあったのであり、それゆえこの場合にこの特定のしるしが選ばれたのである。さらに、しるしの中のすべての特徴が意味を持つことを前提とすべきであり、それらが表すことになっていた王国の中に、それらのすべてを見出すことを期待すべきである。ある王国の性質や歴史の中に、しるしに述べられている特定の事情と、その配列あるいは継起との両方に正確に対応するものが見出されない限り、そのしるしをその王国に公正に適用することはできない。第一の獣のしるしには五つの事柄が含まれており、そのすべてが意味を持っていたと見なされる。すなわち、獅子、鷲の翼、その翼が抜かれたという事実、その獣が持ち上げられて人のように立たされたという事実、そして人の心がそれに与えられたという事実である。これらを順に考察し、次に、それらが知られているどのような状態において成就したかを問うのが適切である。
(a)見られた動物、すなわち「獅子」。「獣の王」である獅子は力と勇気の象徴であり、王の適切な紋章となる。ムスリムがムハンマドの娘婿アリーを「常に勝利する神の獅子」と呼ぶ場合のようにである。聖書でもしばしばこのように用いられる。(Genesis 49:9)。「ユダは獅子の子。わが子よ、あなたは獲物を食べて上がった。彼は伏し、獅子のように、雌獅子のようにうずくまった。だれが彼を起こせるか」。ここでは、その部族の武勇の性質、征服、至上権が疑いなく表されている。(Ezekiel 19:2-3) も同様である。「あなたの母は何か。一頭の雌獅子。彼女は獅子たちの中に伏し、若い獅子たちの中でその子らを育てた」。グロティウスによれば、これは (Genesis 49:9) の暗示である。ユダは、森の獣たちの中の雌獅子のように諸国民の中にあり、力と主権とを持っていた。獅子は英雄の紋章でもある。(2 Samuel 23:20)。「彼はモアブの二人の獅子のような者を打ち殺した」。ゲゼニウスのイザヤ書注釈第1巻851ページを比較せよ。同様に、ホメロスはヘラクレスとアキレウスを θυμολέοντα thumoleonta あるいは λεοντόθυμον leontothumon、すなわち「獅子の心を持つ者」と呼ぶ——『イリアス』第5巻639行、第11巻228行、『オデュッセイア』第11巻766行。獅子の性質、大胆不敵さ、習性についての十分な説明は、ボシャール『Hierozoicon』第3巻第2章 pp. 723-745、およびクレドナー『預言者ヨエル書』s. 100 f. に見られる。聖書の次の箇所も比較せよ。(Psalm 7:2; Psalm 22:21; Psalm 57:4; Psalm 58:6; Psalm 74:4; 1 Samuel 17:37; Job 4:10; Jeremiah 4:7; Jeremiah 49:19; Joel 1:6; Isaiah 29:1-2)。獅子の紋章に関してここでの適切な考え方は、力と征服と支配権において際立つ王または王国ということである。すなわち、他の王たちと王国たちに対して、獅子が森の獣たちの中で占めるのと同じ位置にあり、彼らを恐れさせ、彼らの上に支配を維持し、彼と対峙し抵抗する者のいないまま、望むままに進軍する王または王国のことである。
(b)鷲の翼、すなわち「鷲の翼を持っていた」。ここには、この紋章の一つの特異性——自然の中では結び合わされていないものの結合、一つの動物では表せない事物や性質の表現——が現れている。獅子は、当の王国の一つの事柄あるいは一つの性質——力、支配、主権——を表すであろう。しかし、その王や王国には、獅子の中のいかなるものによっても適切に表すことができず、他の動物に見出される性質を付加することによってのみ象徴できるような特徴があったのである。力、支配、他の獣たちを恐れさせること、その跳躍と一撃の激しさによって際立つ獅子は、速さにおいても、征服に出て行くことにおいても際立ってはいない。彼は目的を遂げるために遠くまで駆け回ることはなく、その動きは迅速さで著名ではない。それゆえ、獅子に鷲の翼が付けられた。したがって、このしるしの適切な考え方は、急速に確保された支配または征服である。獣の王である獅子が、普段のように跳躍や躍動によって一定の空間や範囲に限定されて動くのではなく、鷲がするように、急速で長く続く飛翔によって動き、その征服を遠くまで広げるかのようなものである。この箇所を、クロが「猛禽」にたとえられている (Isaiah 46:11) と比較すれば、このしるしの意味が分かる。「わたしは東から猛禽を呼び、遠い国からわたしのはかりごとを行う者を呼ぶ」。鷲は速さの象徴である。(Jeremiah 4:13)「彼の馬は鷲よりも速い」、(Jeremiah 48:40)「見よ、彼は鷲のように飛び、モアブの上にその翼を広げる」。(Jeremiah 49:22; Lamentations 4:19; Habakkuk 1:8) も見よ。
(c)翼の切除、すなわち「わたしは見ていると、その翼が抜かれた」。用いられた語(מרט meraṭ)は、髭を引き抜くような、引き抜くあるいは引き剥がすことを意味し((Nehemiah 13:25; Isaiah 50:6) を比較)、ここでは鷲の翼から羽や羽軸を抜き取る過程に適切に当てはまる。このしるしの明白で適切な意味は、翼から羽を抜かれた鷲に対するように、征服者の進展に何らかの制止がかけられたということ、すなわちその征服の急速さが止むということである。預言者はこれがなされるまで見守っていたと言うことで、それが一挙に成就したのではなく、これらの征服が遠くまで及んだという印象を残している。しかしついに制止がかけられ、私たちは翼のない獅子を再び見るのである——その勝利をもはや地の上に広げない主権者である。
(d)地からの持ち上げ、すなわち「地から持ち上げられて、人のように両足で立たされた」。これは、翼がこのように抜かれた獅子が、後ろ足でまっすぐに立たされたということである。これは普通ではない姿勢であるが、しるしの意味は難しくない。それは依然として獅子——君主——であったが、獅子が人に変えられたかのように変化したのである。すなわち、獅子の凶暴さと力と活力が、人の比較的弱さに道を譲ったかのようにである。これほど凶暴で強力な獅子が、その本性を大きく変えてまっすぐに立ち、人のように歩くようになったとしたら、というほどの違いが、ここで念頭に置かれた場合に生じていたであろう。これは明らかに、顕著な変化——普通でない何か、凶暴さの減少と、おそらくは獅子よりも弱い人間への、比較的弱い状態への変化とが同時にある事柄——を表す。
(e)人の心を与えること、すなわち「人の心がそれに与えられた」。聖書において「心」という語は、今日私たちの間で普通であるよりも、知性あるいは理解力とより密接な関係を持つことが多い。ここではそれはおそらく、人間性のようなものを表す一般語であろう。すなわち、獅子の本性が人の本性に変えられるほどの大きな変化がその場合に生じるということである。あるいは、鷲の速さと獅子の凶猛さをもってその武具を世界に運んだこの強大な帝国の進路に制止がかけられ、その凶暴さが飼い慣らされ、比較的節度ある人間的なものによって特徴づけられるようになる、という意味かもしれない。(Daniel 4:16) では、ネブカデネザルについて「その心を人の心から変え、獣の心を彼に与えよ」と言われている。ここのしるしが彼を指すとすれば、それは彼が獣のように草を食べることを強いられたあの卑下の場面を指すのではなく、彼が人として当然のように物事を見るよう導かれたという事実を指す。彼は貪欲な獣のように振る舞うのをやめ、静かな省察へと導かれ、理性的存在である人として考え、語るようになったのである。あるいは、君主ではなくバビロン帝国を指すとすれば、君主たちの継起の下でその国民に変化が生じ、帝国の初代君主たちの凶猛さと激烈さがやみ、その国民が征服を閉じただけでなく、実際にある程度は節度があり理性的になった、という意味であろう。
さて、このしるしの適用については、ほとんど困難はなく、注解者たちの間でも意見の相違はほとんどない。すべての者、あるいはほとんどすべての者が、これがネブカデネザルを頭とするバビロン王国と、比較的弱い君主たちの継起の下での征服の凶猛さの漸減とを指すことに同意している。ダニエル書を、ダニエル自身が記した、その記されたと称する時代に書かれた霊感された預言と見ようと、彼の時代よりずっと後に彼の名においてそれを偽造した誰かによって書かれたものと見ようと、これがバビロン帝国の頭、あるいは (Daniel 2) の像において「金の頭」が表すものに関係することには疑いの余地がない。事情はすべてこの適用とあまりにもよく一致しており、幻の説明である (Daniel 7:16-27) ではこの部分は説明されていないが——ダニエルの困惑は特に第四の獣に関するものであったからである (Daniel 7:19)——意図されたものが何であるかについては、合理的な疑いを持ち得ない。その理由は次の通りである。
(a)獣の王である獅子は、ネブカデネザルの時代のその王国を正確に象徴するであろう。その王国は、他の王国たちの中で獅子が他の獣たちの中で占めるのと同じ位置を占め、その力と凶猛さにおいて獅子によってよく表される。(Daniel 2:37-38) の注釈において、この王国の性質と位置の十分な説明を見よ。
(b)鷲の翼は、その王国の急速な征服——いわば自らの本来の領域を離れて外地へ飛び出したかのような様子——を正確に表すであろう。獅子だけなら、すでに勢力を広げ、他の王国たちの頭となっているものとしてのその王国の性質を表したであろう。鷲の翼は、バビロニア人の武具がパレスチナ、エジプト、アッシリヤなどへ運ばれた急速さを表す。このしるしだけでは、クロやアレクサンドロスやカエサルの征服と同様にバビロンを特定し得ないのは事実であるが、それはここで見出される連結の中で解されるべきであり、このしるしがバビロンに驚くべき適合性を持つことは誰も疑い得ない。
(c)これらの翼の切除あるいは抜去は、征服の停止——もはやそれ以上及ばないかのように——を表すであろう。すなわち、かつて他の国民たちの侵略によって際立っていた国民が今やその征服をやめた様子、勝利によってではなく、獅子が森の獣たちの中で頭として立っているように、他のすべての国民たちの頭として立っていることによって注目される様子を見るのである。歴史に通じたすべての者は、ネブカデネザルの下でのその王国の征服の後、それが特徴的に征服で際立つ王国であることをやめ、彼の後継者たちの下でも諸国民の中の卓越あるいは首位を保ったものの、その勝利はそれ以上広げられなかったことを知っている。ネブカデネザルの後継者たちは比較的弱く怠惰な君主たちであり、あたかもその怪物の翼が抜かれたかのようであった。
(d)獅子が足で立ち上がり、人のように両足で立つことは、ネブカデネザルの後継者たちの下での王国の変化を、不適切ではない仕方で表すであろう。上のしるしの説明を見よ。
(e)人の心をそれに与えることは、ネブカデネザルの時代の後、比較的弱く無能な君主たちの継起の下で帝国に生じた変化に、適切に当てはまらないわけではない。獅子の心——「獅子のような心」——の代わりに、人の心を持つようになったのである。すなわち、飼い慣らされていない獣によって表される野性と凶暴さの性質は、人間によってよりよく表されるものに取って代わられたということである。それは獅子の性質が熊や豹の性質に変えられたことではなく、戦士や征服者としての人間でもなく、荒野の野性的で凶暴な獣と区別された人間のことである。ベルシャザルの弱い治世の下で終わるまでの帝国の性質の変化は、このしるしによってよく表され得たであろう。
Original em inglês
The first was like a lion - It is to be assumed, in explaining and applying these symbols, that they are significant - that is, that there was some adaptedness or propriety in using these symbols to denote the kingdoms referred to; or that in each case there was a reason why the particular animal was selected for a symbol rather than one of the others; that is, there was something in the lion that was better fitted to symbolize the kingdom referred to than there was in the bear or the leopard, and this was the reason why this particular symbol was chosen in the case. It is to be further assumed that all the characteristics in the symbol were significant, and we are to expect to find them all in the kingdom which they were designed to represent; nor can the symbol be fairly applied to any kingdom, unless something shall be found in its character or history that shall correspond alike to the particular circumstances referred to in the symbol, and to the grouping or succession. In regard to the first beast, there were five things that entered into the symbol, all of which it is to be presumed were significant: the lion, the eagle's wings - the fact that the wings were plucked - the fact that the beast was lifted up so as to stand up as a man - and the fact that the heart of a man was given to it. It is proper to consider these in their order, and then to inquire whether they found a fulfillment in any known state of things.
(a) The animal that was seen: "the lion." The lion, "the king of beasts," is the symbol of strength and courage, and becomes the proper emblem of a king - as when the Mussulmans call Ali, Mahomet's son-in-law, "The Lion of God, always victorious." Thus it is often used in the Scriptures. Genesis 49:9, "Judah is a lion's whelp: from the prey, my son, thou art gone up: he stooped down, he couched as a lion, and as an old lion; who shall rouse him up?" The warlike character, the conquest, the supremacy of that tribe are here undoubtedly denoted. So in Ezekiel 19:2-3. "What is thy mother? A lioness: she lay down among lions, she nourished her whelps among young lions." Here is an allusion, says Grotius, to Genesis 49:9. Judea was among the nations like a lioness among the beasts of the forest; she had strength and sovereignty. The lion is an emblem of a hero: 2 Samuel 23:20, "He slew two lion-like men of Moab." Compare Gesenius zu Isa. i. 851. So Hercules and Achilles are called by Homer θυμολέοντα thumoleonta, or λεοντόθυμον leontothumon - lion-hearted - Iliad e 639, ee 228, Odyssey l 766. See the character, the intrepidity, and the habits of the lion fully illustrated in Bochart, Hieroz. lib. iii. c. 2, pp. 723-745 - Credner, der prophet Joel, s. 100. f. Compare also the following places in Scripture: Psalm 7:2; Psalm 22:21; Psalm 57:4; Psalm 58:6; Psalm 74:4; 1 Samuel 17:37; Job 4:10; Jeremiah 4:7; Jeremiah 49:19; Joel 1:6; Isaiah 29:1-2. The proper notion here, so far as the emblem of a lion is concerned, is that of a king or kingdom that would be distinguished for power, conquest, dominion; that would be in relation to other kings and kingdoms as the lion is among the beasts of the forest - keeping them in awe, and maintaining dominion over them - marching where he pleases, with none to cope with him or to resist him.
(b) The eagle's wings: "and had eagle's wings." Here appears one peculiarity of the emblem - the union of things which are not found joined together in nature - the representation of things or qualities which no one animal would represent. The lion would denote one thing, or one quality in the kingdom referred to - power, dominion, sovereignty - but there would be some characteristic in that king or kingdom which nothing in the lion would properly represent, and which could be symbolized only by attaching to him qualities to be found in some other animal. The lion, distinguished for his power, his dominion, his keeping other animals in awe - his spring, and the severity of his blow - is not remarkable for his speed, nor for going forth to conquest. He does not range far to accomplish his purpose, nor are his movements eminent for fleetness. Hence, there were attached to the lion the wings of an eagle. The proper notion, therefore, of this symbol, would be that of a dominion or conquest rapidly secured, as if a lion, the king of beasts, should move, not as he commonly does, with a spring or bound, confining himself to a certain space or range, but should move as the eagle does, with rapid and prolonged flight, extending his conquests afar. The meaning of the symbol may be seen by comparing this passage with Isaiah 46:11, where Cyrus is compared to "a ravenous bird" - "calling a ravenous bird from the east, the man that executeth my counsels from a far country." The eagle is an emblem of swiftness: Jeremiah 4:13, "His horses are swifter than eagles;" Jeremiah 48:40, "Behold, he shall fly as an eagle, and shall spread his wings over Moab." See also Jeremiah 49:22; Lamentations 4:19; Habakkuk 1:8.
(c) The clipping of the wings: "I beheld until the wings thereof were plucked" The word used (מרט meraṭ) means, to pluck or pull, as to pull out the beard (compare Nehemiah 13:25; Isaiah 50:6), and would here be properly applied to some process of pulling out the feathers or quills from the wings of the eagle. The obvious and proper meaning of this symbol is, that there was some check put to the progress of the conqueror - as there would be to an eagle by plucking off the feathers from his wings; that is, the rapidity of his conquests would cease. The prophet says, that he looked on until this was done, implying that it was not accomplished at once, but leaving the impression that these conquests were extended far. They were, however, checked, and we see the lion again without the wings; the sovereign who has ceased to spread his triumphs over the earth.
(d) The lifting up from the earth: "and it was lifted up from the earth, and made to stand upon the feet as a man." That is, the lion, with the wings thus plucked off, was made to stand upright on his hind feet - an unusual position, but the meaning of the symbol is not difficult. It was still the lion - the monarch - but changed as if the lion was changed to a man; that is, as if the ferocity, and the power, and the energy of the lion had given place to the comparative weakness of a man. There would be as much difference in the case referred to as there would be if a lion so fierce and powerful should be made so far to change his nature as to stand upright, and to walk as a man. This would evidently denote some remarkable change - something that would be unusual - something where there would be a diminution of ferocity, and yet perhaps a change to comparative weakness - as a man is feebler than a lion.
(e) The giving to it of a man's heart: "and a man heart was given to it." The word heart in the Scriptures often has a closer relation to the intellect or the understanding than it new has commonly with us; and here perhaps it is a general term to denote something like human nature - that is, there would be as great a change in the case as if the nature of the lion should be transformed to that of a man; or, the meaning may be, that this mighty empire, carrying its arms with the rapidity of an eagle, and the fierceness of a lion, through the world, would be checked in its career; its ferocity would be tamed, and it would be characterized by comparative moderation and humanity. In Daniel 4:16, it is said of Nebuchadnezzar, "Let his heart be changed from man's, and let a beast's heart be given unto him;" here, if the symbol refers to him, it does not refer to that scene of humiliation when he was compelled to eat grass like a beast, but to the fact that he was brought to look at things as a man should do; he ceased to act like a ravenous beast, and was led to calm reflection, and to think and speak like a man - a rational being. Or, if it refers to the empire of Babylon, instead of the monarch, it would mean that a change had come over the nation under the succession of princes, so that the fierceness and ferocity of the first princes of the empire had ceased, and the nation had not only closed its conquests, but had actually become, to some extent, moderate and rational.
Now, in regard to the application of this symbol, there can be but little difficulty, and there is almost no difference of opinion among expositors. All, or nearly all, agree that it refers to the kingdom of Babylon, of which Nebuchadnezzar was the head, and to the gradual diminution of the ferocity of conquest under a succession of comparatively weak princes. Whatever view may be taken of the book of Daniel whether it be regarded as inspired prophecy composed by Daniel himself, and written at the time when it professes to have been, or whether it be supposed to have been written long after his time by some one who forged it in his name, there can be no doubt that it relates to the head of the Babylonian empire, or to that which the "head of gold," in the image referred to in Daniel 2, represents. The circumstances all so well agree with that application, that, although in the explication of the dream Daniel 7:16-27 this part of it is not explained - for the perplexity of Daniel related particularly to the fourth beast Daniel 7:19, yet there can be no reasonable doubt as to what was intended. For
(a) the lion - the king of beasts - would accurately symbolize that kingdom in the days of Nebuchadnezzar - a kingdom occupying the same position among other kingdoms which the lion does among other beasts, and well represented in its power and ferocity by the lion. See the character and position of this kingdom fully illustrated in the notes at Daniel 2:37-38.
(b) The eagle's wings would accurately denote the rapid conquests of that kingdom - its leaving, as it were, its own native domain, and flying abroad. The lion alone would have represented the character of the kingdom considered as already having spread itself, or as being at the head of other kingdoms; the wings of the eagle, the rapidity with which the arms of the Babylonians were carried into Palestine, Egypt, Assyria, etc. It is true that this symbol alone would not designate Babylon anymore than it would the conquests of Cyrus, or Alexander, or Caesar, but it is to be taken in the connection in which it is here found, and no one can doubt that it has a striking applicability to Babylon.
(c) The clipping or plucking of these wings would denote the cessation of conquest - as if it would extend no farther; that is, we see a nation once distinguished for the invasion of other nations now ceasing its conquests; and remarkable, not for its victories, but as standing at the head of all other nations, as the lion stands among the beasts of the forest. All who are acquainted with history know that, after the conquests of that kingdom under Nebuchadnezzar, it ceased characteristically to be a kingdom distinguished for conquest, but that, though under his successors, it held a pre-eminence or headship among the nations, yet its victories were extended no further. The successors of Nebuchadnezzar were comparatively weak and indolent princes - as if the wings of the monster had been plucked.
(d) The rising up of the lion on the feet, and standing on the feet as a man, would denote, not inappropriately, the change of the kingdom under the successors of Nebuchadnezzar. See above in the explanation of the symbol.
(e) The giving of a man's heart to it would not be inapplicable to the change produced in the empire after the time of Nebuchadnezzar, and under a succession of comparatively weak and inefficient princes. Instead of the heart of the lion - of being "lion-hearted" - it had the heart of a man; that is, the character of wildness and fierceness denoted by an untamed beast was succeeded by what would be better represented by a human being. It is not the character of the lion changed to that of the bear, or the panther, or the leopard; nor is it man considered as a warrior or conqueror, but man as he is distinguished from the wild and ferocious beast of the desert. The change in the character of the empire, until it ceased under the feeble reign of Belshazzar; would be well denoted by this symbol.
5
Daniel 7:5
日本語
見よ、もう一つの獣、第二のものが、熊に似て現れた——すなわち、獅子が現れ、ダニエルがそれがこれらの驚くべき変化を遂げるのを見届けるまで見守ったあとのことである。この象徴についてもいくつかの事情があり、そのすべてが意味を持っていたと見なされるべきであり、それらを適用しようとする前に、すべてが説明を必要とする。
(a)見られた動物、すなわち熊。熊についての十分な説明は、ボカルト『ヒエロゾイコン』第3巻第9章を見よ。この動物はよく知られており、獅子やその他の動物とは全く異なる特質を備えている。特定の王国を示すためにこの象徴が用いられたのには、疑いなく何らかの理由があり、獅子の場合と同様、その王国の中には、これらの特有の性質に対応する何かがあった。熊は、いくつかの点ではバビロンの適切な代表であり得たが、すべての点において、また主要な点においてそうであったわけではない。ボカルト(『ヒエロゾイコン』第1巻812ページ)によれば、熊は主として二つの点、すなわち狡猾さと凶暴さによって際立っている。アリストテレスは、熊は愚かで向こう見ずであるばかりでなく貪欲であると述べている(ウェミス『聖書の象徴的言語の鍵』)。ヘブル語の名称は、そのうなり声、あるいはほえ声に由来する。(Isaiah 59:11) と比較せよ。
「私たちはみな、熊のようにうなる。」
ホラティウス(Epod. 16, 51)とも比較せよ。
「Nec vespertinus circumgemit ursus ovile.」
——夕暮れの熊も、羊小屋の周りでうなり声を立てない。——
ウェルギリウスも、熊の凶暴さに言及している。
「Atque in praesepibus ursi Saevire.」
——そして熊たちは、飼い葉桶の中で猛り狂う。——『アエネーイス』第七巻17行。
熊は、空腹のとき、あるいは子を奪われたときに、とりわけ凶暴であることが知られている。ヒエロニムス(Hosea 13:8の注解)は、「野獣の性質を研究した者たちの言によれば、子を奪われたとき、あるいは空腹のときほど凶暴な獣はいない」と述べている。(2 Samuel 17:8; Proverbs 17:12; Hosea 13:8) と比較せよ。それゆえ、熊によって示されることになる王国の特性は、凶暴さ、粗野さ、とりわけ挑発されたときの戦争における猛烈さであり、獅子によって示されるものよりも男性的で高貴さに欠ける精神であり、敵に対する処遇が過酷で、激しく野蛮な狡猾さの混じった精神となるであろう。
(b)その一方の側の上に身を起こしたこと。「そして、それは自分の身を一方の側の上に起こした」。ここで用いられたカルデヤ語(שׁטר sheṭar)は、ほかのどこにも現れない。それは「わき腹」を意味し(ゲゼニウス)、ここでは、動物が立ち上がるときに一方の側を他方よりも先に持ち上げたかのように、動物のわき腹に適用される。ラテン語ヴルガートは、これを in parte stetit と訳す。ギリシャ語(ウォルトン版)は έις μέρος ἕν ἐστάθη eis meros hen estathē——「一つの部分の上に立った」——とし、トンプソンはこれを「半ば直立して立った」と訳す。キシアヌス写本は ἐπὶ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλευροῦ ἐστάθη epi tou henos pleurou estathē——「一つのわき腹の上に立った」——である。マウラーはこれを「一方の前足の上に身を横たえ、他方の足の上に立っていた」と訳し、バビロンで発見された石のひとつにまさにこの姿が刻まれており、その図版はミュンター『バビロンの宗教』112ページに見られると言う。レンガーケによれば、バビロンで発見された、ここで言及される動物は「右の前足の上にひざまずいて伏し、左の足で立ち上がろうとする動作のうちにある」。ベルトルトとハヴェルニックは、熊がそうすると言われるのと同様に、前部を挙げて後ろ足の上に立っていたという意味にこれを理解する。しかし、真の姿はおそらくマウラーとレンガーケが述べたものであろう。すなわち、動物は伏した姿勢から身を起こそうとする最中にあり、一方の前足で体を支えながら他方の前足を差し伸べ、その側の体は部分的に持ち上げられていた。この姿勢は、静かに休んでいたものの、今や征服や戦争といった何らかの目的のために、入念に身を起こそうとしている王国を、自然に表すものであろう——伏していた熊が、空腹のとき、あるいは獲物を求めて出て行くときに立ち上がるのと同様である。
(c)その口の中のあばら骨。「そして、それはその口の中に、その歯の間に三本のあばら骨を持っていた」。ベルトルトはこれを牙、すなわちあばら骨のように曲がった牙と理解する(451ページ)。しかし、カルデヤ語(עלע ‛ala‛)の本来の意味は、ヘブル語(צלע tsēlâ‛)と同じく「あばら骨」である(ゲゼニウス)。ラテン語ヴルガートは tres ordines——三つの列——とし、シリア語訳とギリシャ語訳は三本のあばら骨とする。これは熊として十分に特徴的なものであり、ここの動物の姿は、ほかの動物を殺して食らううちにそのわき腹から三本のあばら骨を引き裂き、今それを口にくわえているかのようである。このあばら骨を口にくわえたまま、伏した姿勢からゆっくりと立ち上がろうとしており、やがて出て行って多くの肉を食らえとの命令を受けようとしている。ここの数字「三」について、レンガーケは特別な意味のない切りのよい数であると推定する。ほかの人々は、ここで熊によって表された民が打ち勝った国々や王国の数を表すと考える。おそらく後者の考えのほうが、この象徴から喚起されるより明白な考えであろう。しかし、象徴を正しく理解するために、この点をあまり厳格に押し進める必要はない。この象徴のこの部分から自然に喚起される考えは、凶暴で粗野な性格の王国ないし民が、すでにいくつかの相手を服従させたのち休息し、以前の征服の戦利品を携えて立ち上がり、新たな勝利を得るため、あるいはほかの者たちを征服するために出て行こうとする姿である。このような姿勢にある征服の民を表すものとして、これは非常に印象的な象徴となるであろう。
(d)この獣に与えられた命令。「そして、彼らはそれにこう言った。立ち上がって、多くの肉を食らえ」。すなわち、それに対してそう言われたのであり、権威ある何者かがそれを言ったのである。出て行って食らうよう命じる声が聞かれたのである。この命令は、熊の性質と全く一致している。アリストテレスは熊を σαρκοφαγῶν sarkofagōn——肉を食らうもの——、ξῶον πάμφαγον xōon pamphagon——あらゆるものを食らう獣——と呼んでおり(『動物誌』第8巻5章)、これより優れた描写はあり得ない。象徴として、これは、すでに成し遂げたものよりも広い征服へと出て行けと、いわば神から命令を受けようとしている国、休息から覚めて新たな勝利を成し遂げようとする国に、適切に当てはまる。
この象徴の適用については、御使いはダニエルに説明しなかった。しかし、前の獣がバビロンに関わるのであれば、これが何に適用されるべきかを理解することはほとんど難しくない。それは明らかに、バビロンに続いたもの、すなわちメディア・ペルシャ——クロ、カンビュセス、スメルディス、ダリウス、クセルクセス、アルタクセルクセス、ダリウス・ノトスが相次いで統治し、アレクサンドロス大王によって倒されるまで続いた王国——である。今や唯一の問いは、この王国を表すためにここで用いられた象徴の適切さに関してである。
(a)熊の象徴。すでに見たとおり、熊は、凶暴で粗野で、威圧的で恣意的な国であればどこにでも当てはまり得る。そして、そのような国のいずれにも適用可能でありながら、熊は獅子よりもメディア・ペルシャをよりよく表すことは明らかである。いくつかの点では、いずれの象徴もいずれの国に当てはまり得るが、メディア・ペルシャは、バビロンほど断然として諸国の先頭に立っていたわけではないからである。しかし、その性格に関しては、熊は不適切な象徴ではなかった。国民全体を総合すれば、それは凶暴で粗野で洗練を欠き、諸国と友好を結ぶ気持ちに乏しく、周囲の者が平和や繁栄を享受しているあいだは満足しないものであった。ダニエル第二章の像において、銀の胸と腕によって表されたこの王国は(Daniel 2:32)、その説明の中で「あなたより劣るもの」——すなわちネブカデネザルより劣る——と描写されている(Daniel 2:39)。この王国についての十分に詳しい説明、すなわち、熊の凶暴さによってよく表されるカンビュセスの狂気じみた諸計画とエチオピア人への野蛮な激怒、その凶暴さと愚かさにおいて熊によってよく表されるクセルクセス治下の不運なギリシャ遠征、また獅子と比較された熊によってよく表されるクセルクセス以後の国民性の退化については、(Daniel 2:39) の注解を見よ。その国の歴史に通じた者なら、だれもこの表象の適切さと当てはまりを疑うことはできない。
(b)わき腹を起こすこと、すなわち、休息の状態にあったかのように、また今や行動のために身を覚ましているかのように、伏した姿勢から立ち上がること。メディア・ペルシャに適用されるこの表象については、さまざまな解釈が採られてきた。ヒエロニムスが指摘するとおり、古代のヘブル人解釈者たちは、その王国が「一方の側に」あるというのを、離れて、という意味に解した。すなわち、この王国はユダヤから離れて保たれ、ユダヤに害を及ぼさなかったというのである。グロティウスも同様に、これを「Judea nihil nocuit」——ユダヤに何の害も与えなかった——という意味に解する。シリア人エフレムとテオドレトスは、メディア・ペルシャ帝国がユダヤのわき側に位置していたか、バビロンのように全世界に支配権を広げることなく、本来の境域内にとどまっていたという意味に解する。ローゼンミュラーは、獅子によって表された王国との関係で、それがそのわきにあった——両者が東方の諸地域を占めていた——という意味に解する。ヨハン・D・ミカエリスは、熊が身を起こすとき一方の部分が他方よりも高く挙げられているのと同じように、メディア・ペルシャ帝国が二つの王国から成り、その一方が他方よりも高められ、進んでいたことを示すものと理解する。
レンガーケと比較せよ。しかし、真の意味はこうである。ダニエルに見えたとおり、休息の状態にあったあの国民が、いまや新たな征服のために身を整えていた、ということである。これは、クロがリディアの王国等を征服したのちに休息し、いまやバビロンの征服と服従のために覚めようとしていた、メディア・ペルシャ帝国の状態を描写するものであり、あらゆる点でよく当てはまる。それゆえ、ここで示される正確な時期は、紀元前544年ごろ(カルメ)であろう。そのときクロは、メディア人に打ち勝ち、リディアの征服とクロイソスの廃位を確保したのち、バビロンの滅亡を企図していた。この休息の間隔は約一年続き、ちょうどこの時期に、連合帝国は、わき腹を起こして立ち上がる熊の像の下に、新たな征服へと出て行くために覚めつつあるものとして見られるのである。
(c)獣の口の中のあばら骨。上で述べたとおり、これは本来、以前のある征服を指す。そのような様子で現れる熊は、ほかの何らかの動物が自分によって打ち勝たれ、殺され、引き裂かれたことを示すであろうからである。もしここで象徴された勢力が以前の戦争において成功し、王国ないし民を引き裂いてきたのであれば、この表象は成就したことになる。この描写が、バビロンを攻撃する前の、あるいはバビロンの上に支配を広げてメディア・ペルシャ王国として確立する前の、メディア・ペルシャの勢力に当てはまることは、だれも疑うことができない。(Daniel 2:39) の注解と比較せよ。クロは戦争なしにメディアの王位を継いだと、一般に考えられてきた。しかしこれは事実から程遠い——『キュロスの教育』という一種の物語の中でそのように描かれているとはいえ。他方、クセノフォンの『アナバシス』には、彼が武力によってメディアを服従させたという事実が明確に認められている(第3巻4章7節、12節)。ヘロドトス、クテシアス、イソクラテス、ストラボンもまた、事実そうであったことに一致している。ティグリス川上流は一つの戦役の舞台であり、そこでラリサとメスピラの諸都市がクロによって占領された。ストラボンから私たちは、決定的な戦いが、クロがのちにペルシャの首都として建設したパサルガダエを、まさにその場所に建てた場所で戦われたことを知る。キットー『百科事典』「クロ」の項を見よ。これに加えて、リディアその他におけるクロのよく知られた諸征服を思い起こすなら、この表象の適切さは明らかとなろう。数字の三がこの表象において意味を持つかどうかは確実ではないが、バビロンに対して攻勢の動きがなされたとき、実際にクロの支配下にあったペルシャ、メディア、リディアの三王国への言及があった可能性はある。
(d)「立ち上がって、多くの肉を食らえ」という命令。これをメディア・ペルシャの勢力に向けられたものと考えるとき、その適切さを見誤る者はいない。この勢力こそ、バビロンを服従させ、世界のかなりの部分をその支配下に置き、ダリウスとクセルクセスのもとでその百万人をギリシャへと注ぎ込んだものである。それゆえ、ここで用いられた表象は、用い得るものの中で最も印象的で適切なもののひとつであり、それがこの王国を指していたこと、またすべての細部において明確な成就があったことは、疑われ得ないのである。
Original em inglês
And, behold, another beast, a second, like to a bear - That is, after the lion had appeared, and he had watched it until it had undergone these surprising transformations. There are several circumstances, also, in regard to this symbol, all of which, it is to be supposed, were significant, and all of which demand explication before it is attempted to apply them.
(a) The animal seen: the bear. For a full description of the bear, see Bochart, Hieroz. lib. iii. c. 9: The animal is well known, and has properties quite distinct from the lion and other animals. There was doubtless some reason why this symbol was employed to denote a particular kingdom, and there was something in the kingdom that corresponded with these peculiar properties, as there was in the case of the lion. The bear might, in some respects, have been a proper representative of Babylon, but it would not in all nor in the main respects. According to Bochart (Hiefoz, vol. i. p. 812), the bear is distinguished mainly for two things, cunning and ferocity. Aristotle says that the bear is greedy as well as silly and foolhardy. (Wemyss, Key to the Symbolic Language of Scripture.) The name in Hebrew is taken from his grumbling or growling. Compare Isaiah 19:11 :
"We roar all like bears."
Compare Horace, Epod. 16, 51:
"Nec vespertinus circumgemit ursus ovile."
Virgil mentions their ferocity:
"Atque in praesepibus ursi Saevire."
- AEn. vii. 17.
The bear is noted as especially fierce when hungry, or when robbed of its whelps. Jerome (on Hosea 13:8) remarks, "It is said by those who have studied the nature of wild beasts, that none among them is more ferocious than the bear when deprived of its young, or when hungry." Compare 2 Samuel 17:8; Proverbs 17:12; Hosea 13:8. The characteristics of the kingdom, therefore, that would be denoted by the bear would be ferocity, roughness, fierceness in war, especially when provoked; a spirit less manly and noble than that denoted by the lion; severe in its treatment of enemies, with a mixture of fierce and savage cunning.
(b) Its rising up on one of its sides: "and it raised up itself on one side." The Chaldee word used here (שׁטר sheṭar) occurs nowhere else. It means side (Gesenius), and would be applied here to the side of an animal, as if he lifted up one side before the other when he rose. The Latin Vulgate renders it, in parte stetit. The Greek (Walton), έις μέρος ἕν ἐστάθη eis meros hen estathē - "it stood on one part;" or, as Thompson renders it, "he stood half erect." The Codex Chisianus, ἐπὶ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλευροῦ ἐστάθη epi tou henos pleurou estathē - "it stood upon one side." Maurer renders this, "on one of its forefeet it was recumbent, and stood on the other," and says that this is the figure exhibited on one of the stones found in Babylon, an engraving of which may be seen in Munter, Religion d. Babyl. p. 112. The animal referred to here, as found in Babylon, says Lengerke, "lies kneeling on the right forefoot, and is in the act of rising on the left foot." Bertholdt and Havernick understand this as meaning that the animal stood on the hindfeet, with the forepart raised, as the bear is said to do; but probably the true position is that referred to by Maurer and Lengerke, that the animal was in the act of raising itself up from a recumbent posture, and rested on one of its forefeet while the other was reached out, and the body on that side was partially raised. This position would naturally denote a kingdom that had been quiet and at rest, but that was now rousing itself deliberately for some purpose, as of conquest or war - as the bear that had been couching down would rise when hungry, or when going forth for prey.
(c) The ribs in its mouth: "and it had three ribs in the mouth of it between the teeth of it." Bertholdt understands this of fangs or tusks - or fangs crooked or bent like ribs, p. 451, But the proper meaning of the Chaldee עלע ‛ala‛ is the same as the Hebrew צלע tsēlâ‛ - "a rib." - Gesenius. The Latin Vulgate is, tres ordines - three rows; the Syriac and the Greek, three ribs. This would be sufficiently characteristic of a bear, and the attitude of the animal here seems to be that it had killed some other animal, and had, in devouring it, torn out three ribs from its side, and now held them in its mouth. It was slowly rising from a recumbent posture, with these ribs in its mouth, and about to receive a command to go forth and devour much flesh. The number three, in this place, Lengerke supposes to be a round number, without any special significancy; others suppose that it denotes the number of nations or kingdoms which the people here represented by the bear had overcome. Perhaps this latter would be the more obvious idea as suggested by the symbol, but it is not necessary, in order to a proper understanding of a symbol, to press such a point too closely. The natural idea which would be suggested by this part of the symbol would be that of a kingdom or people of a fierce and rough character having already subdued some, and then, after reposing, rising up with the trophies of its former conquests to go forth to new victories, or to overcome others. The symbol would be a very striking one to represent a conquering nation in such a posture.
(d) The command given to this beast: "and they said thus unto it, Arise, devour much flesh." That is, it was said to it; or some one having authority said it. A voice was heard commanding it to go forth and devour. This command is wholly in accordance with the nature of the bear. The bear is called by Aristotle σαρκοφαγῶν sarkofagōn, flesh-eater, and ξῶον πάμφαγον xōon pamphagon, a beast devouring everything (Hist. Nat. viii. 5), and no better description could be given of it. As a symbol, this would properly be applicable to a nation about receiving, as it were, a command from God to go forth to wider conquests than it had already made; to arouse itself from its repose and to achieve new triumphs.
The application of this symbol was not explained by the angel to Daniel; but if the former pertained to Babylon, there can be little difficulty in understanding to what this is to be applied. It is evidently to what succeeded the Babylonian - the Medo-Persian, the kingdom ruled successively by Cyrus, Cambyses, Smerdis, Darius, Xerxes, Artaxerxes, and Darius Nothus, until it was overthrown by Alexander the Great. The only inquiry now is as to the pertinency of the symbol here employed to represent this kingdom.
(a) The symbol of the bear. As already seen, the bear would denote any fierce, rough, overbearing, and arbitrary kingdom, and it is clear that while it might have applicability to any such kingdom, it would better represent that of Medo-Persia than the lion would, for while, in some respects, either symbol would be applicable to either nation, the Medo-Persian did not stand so decidedly at the head of nations as the Babylonian. As to its character, however, the bear was not an inappropriate symbol. Taking the whole nation together, it was fierce and rough, and unpolished, little disposed to friendliness with the nations, and dissatisfied while any around it had peace or prosperity. In the image seen in Dan. ii., this kingdom, denoted by the breast and arms of silver Daniel 7:32, is described in the explanation Daniel 7:39 as "inferior to thee;" that is, to Nebuchadnezzar. For a sufficiently full account of this kingdom - of the mad projects of Cambyses, and his savage rage against the Ethiopians - well represented by the ferocity of the bear; of the ill-starred expedition to Greece under Xerxes - an expedition in its fierceness and folly well represented by the bear, and of the degeneracy of the national character after Xerxes - well represented by the bear as compared with the lion, see the notes at Daniel 2:39. No one acquainted with the history of that nation can doubt the propriety and applicability of the emblem.
(b) The rising up on its side, or from a recumbent posture, as if it had been in a state of repose, and was now arousing itself for action. Different interpretations have been adopted of this emblem as applicable to the Medo-Persians. The ancient Hebrew interpreters, as Jerome remarks, explain it as meaning that that kingdom was "on one side" in the sense of separate; that is, that this kingdom kept itself aloof from Judea, or did not inflict injury on it. Thus also Grotius explains it as meaning that it did not injure Judea - Judea nihil nocuit." Ephraern the Syrian, and Theodoret, explain it as meaning that the empire of the Medo-Persians was situated on the side of Judea, or held itself within its proper bounds, in the sense that it never extended its dominion, like Babylon, over the whole earth. Rosenmuller explains it as meaning that in relation to the kingdom represented by the lion, it was at its side, both occupying the regions of the East. John D. Michaelis understands it as denoting that, as the bear was raising itself up, one part being more raised than the other, the Medo-Persian empire was composed of two kingdoms, one of which was more exalted or advanced than the other.
Compare Lengerke. The true meaning however, is that, as seen by Daniel, the nation that had been in a state of repose was now preparing itself for new conquests - a state descriptive of, and in every way quite applicable to the condition of the Medo-Persian empire, after the conquests by Cyrus, as he overran the kingdom of Lydia, etc., then reposing, and now about arousing to the conquest and subjugation of Babylon. The precise time, therefore, indicated would be about 544 b.c. (Calmer), when, having overcome the Medes, and having secured the conquest of Lydia, and the dethronement of Croesus, he is meditating the destruction of Babylon. This interval of repose lasted about a year, and it is at this time that the united empire is seen, under the image of the bear rising on its side, arousing itself to go forth to new conquests.
(c) The ribs in the mouth of the beast. This, as above remarked, would properly refer to some previous conquest - as a bear appearing in that manner would indicate that some other animal had been overcome and slain by him, and torn in pieces. The emblem would be fulfilled if the power here symbolized had been successful in former wars, and had rent kingdoms or people asunder. That this description would apply to the Medo-Persian power before its attack on Babylon, or before extending its dominion over Babylon, and its establishment as the Medo-Persian kingdoms, no one can doubt. Compare the notes at Daniel 2:39. It has been commonly supposed that Cyrus succeeded to the throne of Media without war. But this is far from being the case - though so represented in what may be regarded as the romance of the Cyropaedia In the Anabasis of Xenophon, however, the fact of his having subdued Media by arms is distinctly admitted, Daniel 3:4, Daniel 3:7, Daniel 3:12. Herodotus, Ctesias, Isocrates, and Strabo, all agree also in the fact that it was so. The Upper Tigris was the seat of one campaign, where the cities of Larissa and Mespila were taken by Cyrus. From Strabo we learn that the decisive battle was fought on the spot where Cyrus afterward built Pasargardae, in Persia, for his capital. See Kitto, Cyclo., art. "Cyrus." In addition to this, we are to remember the well-known conquests of Cyrus in Lydia and elsewhere, and the propriety of the emblem will be apparent. It may not be certain that the number three is significant in the emblem, but it is possible that there may have been reference to the three kingdoms of Persia, Media, and Lydia, that were actually under the dominion of Cyrus when the aggressive movement was made on Babylon.
(d) The command to "arise and devour much flesh." No one can fail to see the appropriateness of this, considered as addressed to the Medo-Persian power - that power which subdued Babylon; which brought under its dominion a considerable part of the world, and which, under Darius and Xerxes, poured its million on Greece. The emblem used here is, therefore, one of the most striking and appropriate that could be employed, and it cannot be doubted that it had reference to this kingdom, and that, in all the particulars, there was a clear fulfillment.
6
Daniel 7:6
日本語
こののち私は見た。見よ、また別の、豹に似た獣が現れた——すなわち、前と同様、熊が現れたあとのことで、これが継起する王国ないし勢力であることを示している。今や現れた獣は怪物であり、前の諸場合と同様、この象徴を理解するためには説明を要するいくつかの事情がある。ダニエルに現れた姿のままのこの動物を眼前に思い描くことは、ここで導入された象徴について正しい観念を形成する助けとなるであろう。
(a)動物そのもの、すなわち「豹」。ここで用いられた語 נמר nemar——ヘブル語では נמר nâmêr——は、その斑点からその名で呼ばれるパンサーすなわち豹を表す。これはよく知られた猛獣であり、血への渇望と残虐さによって際立ち、これらの特徴はとりわけ雌のパンサーに当てはまる。聖書はこの動物を、次の事がらの表象として、あるいは次の特徴を持つものとして言及している。
(1)威厳において獅子の次に位し、おおよその性質が同じであること。ボカルト『ヒエロゾイコン』第1部第3巻第7章と比較せよ。それゆえ、獅子とパンサーすなわち豹とは、聖書においてしばしば結び合わされて言及される。(Jeremiah 5:6; Hosea 13:7) と比較せよ。外典の集会書28:23にも見よ。ホメロスも同様に、この二つを結び合わせている。
Ὄυτε οἶν παρδάλιος τόσσον μένος, ὄυτε λέοντος.
Oute oun pardalios tosson menos, oute leontos.
「豹も獅子も、これほどの力は持っていなかった。」
(2)温和で飼い慣らされた動物と対照的な、残虐さ、すなわち荒々しい性質によって際立っていること。(Isaiah 11:6)、「豹は子やぎとともに伏す」。(Jeremiah 5:6) では、獅子および狼と並べて比較されている。「森から出た獅子が彼らを殺し、夕暮れの狼が彼らを荒らし、豹が彼らの町々を見張る」。(Hosea 13:7) と比較せよ。
(3)速さ、あるいは疾走によって際立っていること。(Habakkuk 1:8)、「彼らの馬は豹よりも速い」。上述のボカルト788ページにおける古典からの引用とも比較せよ。その速さは——とりわけ飛びかかる跳躍の迅捷さは——ギリシャおよびローマの著述家たちによってしばしば言及されている。
(4)陰険であること、すなわち待ち伏せし、不注意な旅人に不意に飛びかかること。(Hosea 13:7) と比較せよ。「道のかたわらの豹のように、私は彼らを見張る」——すなわち、私は彼らを「見張る」(אשׁור 'âshûr)のである。プリニウスも豹について次のように言っている。「Insidunt pardi condensa arborurn, occultatique earurn ramis in prcetereuntia desiliunt」——すなわち、豹たちは密な木々に潜み、その枝に身を隠して、通り過ぎるものに飛びかかる、である。
(5)斑点によって特徴づけられること。この動物の全般的な性質は、獅子と強く似ている。このように、ボカルトが引用するあるアラビアの著述家は、豹を「獅子に似ているが、より小さく、黒い斑点のある皮膚を持つ動物」と定義している。象徴として用いられるとき、この表現に含まれる本来の観念は、熊で表された国よりも高い貴格を持つが、獅子で表されたものほど他国に対する確固たた首長権を持たない国ないし王国、征服に耽り、他国を略奪の対象とする国、動きが速く、不意に他国に飛びかかる国——そしておそらくはその斑点において、同質の要素からではなく、さまざまに異なる民から成る国ないし民——のことであろう。下のこの適用の箇所を見よ。
(b)四つの翼。「その背には鳥の四つの翼があった」。第一の獣は鷲の翼を持って現れたが、その数は示されなかった。これには翼があるが、特定の種類の翼は示されず、数だけが述べられている。どちらの場合にも、意図されているのは疑いなく移動の迅捷さである——獅子や豹という動物そのものが適切に表し得るものを超えた迅捷さである。一方では翼の種類を、他方ではその数を述べていることによって表現の意図に違いがあるとすれば、前者はより大胆で広範な飛翔を、後者は四つの翼によって表されるより速い飛翔を意味する可能性が高い。前者の成就は、征服をより広い空間に広げた国に、後者のそれは、より速く移動した国に求めるべきである。しかし、これらの類似をあまりに押し進める危険もある。この箇所では、翼が動物の背にあったことのほか、翼の配列については何も述べられていない。両側に二つずつあったと考えるべきである。
(c)四つの頭。「その獣にはまた四つの頭があった」。この表現が意味するように意図されたのは、次のいずれかでなければならない。すなわち、豹で示された一つの勢力ないし王国が、今や一つに結合した四つの別個の勢力ないし民から成っていたこと、あるいは、その歴史を構成する四人の王ないし王朝が継起したこと、あるいは、その勢力ないし王国が、その卓越した特徴において、四つの頭を持つ別個の支配領域として、すなわちそれだけの数の別個の主権に分かれたものとして、実際に現れたことである。これらのうちのどれもが、この像の意図の適切で自然な成就であり得ると私には思われる。ただし、第二の考えは他の二つよりも適切でない。というのも、頭は、第四の獣で表されたように小さな角が他の十の角の中から生えたように継起して現れたのではなく、同時に存在したからである。おおよその観念は、一つの特定の主権が、何らかの仕方で、一つに溶け合った四つの力の源を持つか、あるいは実際に同じ種類の支配を行い、事実上、他のものと区別される一つの王国を構成した、ということである。
(d)それに与えられた支配。「そして、支配がそれに与えられた」。すなわち、前者が支配していたところを支配し、別のもの——十の角を持つ獣——がそれに続くまで、と定められていた、ということである。
この適用については、御使いは (Daniel 7:17) において、一つの王国がそれによって表されるという一般的な説明のほかは、ダニエルに解き明かさなかった。とはいえ、抱かれてきた見解には多少の相違があるものの、ほとんど困難はないように思われる。マウラー、レンガーケ、その他の何人かは、これをメディア・ペルシャ帝国に当てはめる——第二の象徴はメディアの王国を指すと考えるのである。しかし、これに対する反論はあまりにも明白で数多いため、その意見は抱き得ないと私は考える。すなわち、
(1)メディアの王国は、いかなる適切な意味においても、バビロンを継承しなかった。
(2)三本のあばら骨をくわえた熊という表現は、メディアには適切に当てはまらない。
(3)上に見た第二の獣についての描写全体は、メディア・ペルシャ帝国の歴史と完全に一致する。
そうであれば、この象徴——第三のもの——の成就は、メディア・ペルシャに直接続いた王国ないし王朝の中に自然に求められることになる。すなわち、アレクサンドロス大王によって建てられたマケドニアの王朝ないし王国であり、以前バビロンとメディア・ペルシャ帝国によって占められていた同じ諸国に広がり、ローマの征服に呑み込まれるまで続いた。すべての事情がこの想定と一致することを、私たちは見るであろう。
(a)動物、すなわち豹。この動物の比較的高貴なこと、猛獣であること、動きの迅捷なこと、獲物に飛びかかる跳躍——これらはすべて、アレクサンドロスが創設者であった王国とよく一致する。実際、古代の他のどの王国にも、これほどよく当てはめることはできなかった。ダニエルがマケドニア帝国を表す象徴を選ぶことを意図したと想定するなら、豹ほどそれに適したものを選び得なかったことは認められるであろう。これまで注意されたこの動物のすべての特徴——
(1)威厳において獅子の次であること、
(2)荒々しい性質によって際立つこと、
(3)速さによって特徴づけられること、
(4)待ち伏せし、獲物に不意に飛びかかることで知られること、
(5)まもなく述べる斑点——
はすべて、アレクサンドロスの特徴、諸国の中での彼の動き、そして彼が東方に建てた王国と一致する。
(b)四つの翼。これらはアレクサンドロスの征服の迅速さをよく表す。東方における彼の征服ほど迅速な征服は、かつてなされたことがない。第一の獣については翼の数が述べられていないのと対照的に、豹には四つの翼があったことが注意された。一方はより広い飛翔を、他方はより速い飛翔を意味し、一方はネブカデネザルの征服と、他方はアレクサンドロスの征服とよく一致する。
(c)一つのからだに結合した四つの頭。アレクサンドロスが死んだとき、その帝国が彼の四人の将軍たちに残され、彼らが同じ数の別個の支配領域の長となったが、すべて同じ源から、事実上すべてマケドニア帝国から出たことは、よく知られている。この事実は、四つの別個で独立した動物によってよりも、四つの頭を持つ一つの動物によって、よりよく表される。すなわち、頭が権威ないし支配を表すとすれば、一つの帝国が、事実上、今や四つの別個の権威によって統治されるのである。マケドニアのものと見なされる一つの帝国は、ローマ人たちに呑み込まれるまでその支配を続けた。すなわち、バビロンやメディア・ペルシャのものとは異なる特性を持ち、新しい秩序をもたらしたマケドニアの勢力ないし支配は、その勢力が分解され、別個の主権の現れの下で行使された後も続いたのである。実際、この帝国の建設をその人に負っていたアレクサンドロスが死んだとき、「アレクサンドロスの兄弟フィリポス・アリダイオスと、ロクサナが産んだ彼の幼い子が、軍の将軍たちによって後継者に任じられ、ペルディッカスが摂政とされた。帝国は三十三の統治区に分けられ、同じ数の将軍たちに分配された。ここから、血なまぐさい荒廃をもたらす一連の戦争が起こり、世界の歴史においてほとんど類のない混乱、無政府、犯罪の時代が続いた。アンティゴノスが敗れた紀元前301年のイプソスの戦いののち、帝国は四つの王国に分かれた。リュシマコスの下のトラキアとビテュニア、セレウコスの下のシリアと東方諸国、プトレマイオス・ソテルの下のエジプト、カッサンドロスの下のマケドニアである」——ライマン『歴史図表』。アレクサンドロスが建てた一つの帝国からこのように生じたこれら四つの勢力こそ、四つの頭によって明らかに表されたものである。
(d)それに与えられた支配。これに完全に対応する支配がアレクサンドロスとマケドニア王朝に与えられたことは、だれも疑うことができない。実際、世界の支配は事実上その王国に譲られたのである。
(e)もう一つだけ注意すべき事情がある。ただし、そのことについて特定の出来事の中に正確な成就を求めるべきではないかもしれない。それは、豹が斑点によって特徴づけられているという事実である。多くの人は、アレクサンドロスの帝国内に同質でない多数の国々があったという事実の中に、この成就を見てきた。このようにボカルトは『ヒエロゾイコン』第1部第3巻第7章789ページで言う。「豹の斑点は、彼が支配した諸国民のさまざまな風習を指す。これらの中には、ヨーロッパではマケドニア人のほかにギリシャ人、トラキア人、イリュリア人がおり、アフリカではリビア人、エジプト人、トログロディテスがおり、アジアではガンジス川に至るまでほとんどすべての国民がいた」。しかし、この点に固執しなくても、明らかに象徴として意図された他の諸細部を比較するなら、それらがマケドニア帝国において完全な成就を持ったことを認めないではいられない。
Original em inglês
After this I beheld, and, lo, another, like a leopard - That is, as before, after the bear had appeared - indicating that this was to be a succeeding kingdom or power. The beast which now appeared was a monster, and, as in the former cases, so in regard to this, there are several circumstances which demand explanation in order to understand the symbol. It may assist us, perhaps, in forming a correct idea of the symbol here introduced to have before us a representation of the animal as it appeared to Daniel.
(a) The animal itself: "a leopard." The word used here - נמר nemar - or in Hebrew נמר nâmêr - denotes a panther or leopard, so called from his spots. This is a well-known beast of prey, distinguished for blood-thirstiness and cruelty, and these characteristics are especially applicable to the female panther. The animal is referred to in the Scriptures as emblematic of the following things, or as having the following characteristics:
(1) As next in dignity to the lion - of the same general nature. Compare Bochart, Hieroz. P. I. lib. iii. c. vii. Thus the lion and the panther, or leopard, are often united in the Scriptures. Compare Jeremiah 5:6; Hosea 13:7. See also in the Apocrypha, Ecclesiasticus 28:23. So also they are united in Homer, r
Ὄυτε οἶν παρδάλιος τόσσον μένος, ὄυτε λέοντος.
Oute oun pardalios tosson menos, oute leontos.
"Neither had the leopard nor the lion such strength."
(2) As distinguished for cruelty, or a fierce nature, as contrasted with the gentle and tame animal. Isaiah 11:6, "and the leopard shall lie down with the kid." In Jeremiah 5:6, it is compared with the lion and the wolf: "A lion out of the forest shall slay them, and a wolf of the evenings shall spoil them, a leopard shall watch over their cities." Compare Hosea 13:7.
(3) As distinguished for swiftness or fleetness. Habakkuk 1:8 : "their horses are swifter than the leopards." Compare also the quotations from the classics in Bochart as above, p. 788. His fleetness is often referred to - the celerity of his spring or bound especially - by the Greek and Roman writers.
(4) As insidious, or as lying in wait, and springing unexpectedly upon the unwary traveler. Compare Hosea 13:7 : "As a leopard by the way will I observe them;" that is, I will "watch" (אשׁור 'âshûr) them. So Pliny says of leopards: Insidunt pardi condensa arborurn, occultatique earurn ramis in prcetereuntia desiliunt.
(5) They are characterized by their spots. In the general nature of the animal there is a strong resemblance to the lion. Thus, an Arabic writer quoted by Bochart, deflates the leopard to be "an animal resembling the lion, except that it is smaller, and has a skin marked by black spots." The proper idea in this representation, when used as a symbol, would be of a nation or kingdom that would have more nobleness than the one represented by the bear, but a less decisive headship over others than that represented by the lion; a nation that, was addicted to conquest, or that preyed upon others; a nation rapid in its movements, and springing upon others unawares, and perhaps in its spots denoting a nation or people made up, not of homogeneous elements, but of various different people. See below in the application of this.
(b) The four wings: which had upon the back of it four wings of a fowl. The first beast was seen with the wings of an eagle, but without any specified number; this appears with wings, but without specifying any particular kind of wings, though the number is mentioned. In both of them celerity of movement is undoubtedly intended - celerity beyond what would be properly denoted by the animal itself the lion or the leopard. If there is a difference in the design of the representation, as there would seem to be by mentioning the kind of wings in the one case, and the number in the other, it is probable that the former would denote a more bold and extended flight; the latter a flight more rapid, denoted by the four wings. We should look for the fulfillment of the former in a nation that extended its conquests over a broader space; in the latter, to a nation that moved with more celerity. But there is some danger of pressing these similitudes too far. Nothing is said in the passage about the arrangement of the wings, except that they were on the back of the animal. It is to be supposed that there were two on each side.
(c) The four heads: "the beast had also four heads." This representation must have been designed to signify either that the one power or kingdom denoted by the leopard was composed of four separate powers or nations now united in one; or that there were four successive kings or dynasties that made up its history; or that the power or kingdom actually appeared, as seen in its prevailing characteristic, as a distinct dominion, as having four heads, or as being divided into so many separate sovereignties. It seems to me that either one of these would be a proper and natural fulfillment of the design of the image, though the second suggested would be less proper than either of the others, as the heads appeared on the animal not in succession - as the little horn sprung up in the midst of the other ten, as represented in the fourth beast - but existed simultaneously. The general idea would be, that in some way the one particular sovereignty had four sources of power blended into one, or actually exerted the same kind of dominion, and constituted, in fact, the one kingdom as distinguished from the others.
(d) The dominion given to it: "and dominion was given to it." That is, it was appointed to rule where the former had ruled, and until it should be succeeded by another - the beast with the ten horns.
In regard to the application of this, though the angel did not explain it to Daniel, except in general that a kingdom was represented by it. Daniel 7:17, it would seem that there could be little difficulty, though there has been some variety in the views entertained. Maurer, Lengerke, and some others, refer it to the Medo-Persian empire - supposing that the second symbol referred to the kingdom of Media. But the objections to this are so obvious, and so numerous, that it seems to me the opinion cannot be entertained, for
(1) the kingdom of Media did not, in any proper sense, succeed that of Babylon;
(2) the representation of the bear with three ribs has no proper application to Media;
(3) the whole description, as we have seen above, of the second beast, accords entirely with the history of the Medo-Persian empire.
If this be so, then we naturally look for the fulfillment of this symbol - the third head - in the kingdom or dynasty that followed directly that of Medo-Persia - the Macedonian dynasty or kingdom founded by Alexander the Great, extending over the same countries before occupied by Babylon and the Medo-Persian empire, and continuing until it was swallowed up in the conquests of Rome. We shall find that all the circumstances agree with this supposition:
(a) The animal - the leopard. The comparative nobleness of the animal; a beast of prey; the celerity of its movements; the spring or bound with which it leaps upon its prey - all agree well with the kingdom of which Alexander was the founder. Indeed there was no other kingdom among the ancients to which it could be better applied; and it will be admitted that, on the supposition that it was the design of Daniel to choose a symbol that would represent the Macedonian empire, he could not have selected one that was better adapted to it than the leopard. All the characteristics of the animal that have been noticed -
(1) as next in dignity to the lion:
(2) as distinguished for a fierce nature;
(3) as characterized by fleetness;
(4) as known for lying in wait, and springing suddenly upon its prey; and
(5) in the point to be noticed soon - their spots - all agree with the characteristics of Alexander, and his movements among the nations, and with the kingdom that was founded by him in the East.
(b) The four wings. These represent well the rapidity of the conquests of Alexander, for no more rapid conquests were ever made than were his in the East. It was noticed that the leopard had four wings, as contrasted with the first beast, in reference to which the number is not mentioned: the one denoting a broader flight, and the other a more rapid one; and the one agrees well with the conquests of Nebuchadnezzar, and the other with those of Alexander.
(c) The four heads united to one body. It is well known that when Alexander died, his empire was left to four of his generals, and that they came to be at the head of as many distinct dominions, yet all springing from the same source, and all, in fact, out of the Macedonian empire. This fact would not be so well represented by four distinct and separate animals, as by one animal with four heads; that is, as the head represents authority or dominion, one empire, in fact, now ruling by four distinct authorities. The one empire, considered as Macedonian, continued its sway until it was swallowed up by the Romans; that is, the Macedonian power or dominion as distinct from that of Babylon or Medo-Persia; as having characteristics unlike these; as introducing a new order of things, continued, though that power was broken up and exercised under distinct manifestations of sovereignty. The fact was, that, at the death of Alexander, to whom the founding of this empire was owing, "Philip Aridaeus, brother of Alexander, and his infant son by Roxana, were appointed by the generals of the army to succeed, and Perdiccas was made regent. The empire was divided into thirty-three governments, distributed among as many general officers. Hence arose a series of bloody, desolating wars, and a period of confusion, anarchy, and crime ensued, that is almost without a parallel in the history of the world. After the battle of Ipsus, 301 b.c., in which Antigonus was defeated, the empire was divided into four kingdoms - Thrace and Bithynia under Lysimachus; Syria and the East under Seleucus; Egypt, under Ptolemy Soter; and Macedonia under Cassander." - Lyman Hist. Chart. It was these four powers, thus springing out of the one empire founded by Alexander, that was clearly represented by. the four heads.
(d) The dominion given to it. No one can doubt that a dominion was given to Alexander and the Macedonian dynasty, which would fully correspond with this. In fact the dominion of the world was practically conceded to that kingdom.
(e) There is only one other circumstance to be noticed, though perhaps we are not to seek an exact accomphshment for that in any specific events. It is the fact tbat the leopard is marked by spots - a circumstance which many have supposed had a fulfillment in the fact that numerous nations, not homogeneous, were found in the empire of Alexander. So Bochart, Hieroz. P. I. lib. iii. c. vii. p. 789, says: "The spots of the leopard refer to the different customs of the nations over which he ruled. Among these, besides the Macedonians, Greeks, Thracians, and Illyrians, in Europe, there were in Africa the Libyans, Egyptians, and Troglodites; in Asia, almost all the nations to the Ganges." But, without insisting on this, no one can compare the other particulars which were clearly designed to be symbolic, without perceiving that they had a full accomplishment in the Macedonian empire.
7
Daniel 7:7
日本語
こののち、私は夜の幻のうちに見た——ほかの獣たちも夢のうちに見られたのであり (Daniel 7:1)、これもおそらく同じ夜の、夢の後続の部分として見られたのであろう。幻の全体が明らかに一つの夢のうちに預言者の前を過ぎ去ったからである。継起、すなわち彼が一方の後に他方を見たという事実は、諸王国における継起を示している。それらは同時に地の上にあるのではなく、ここに示された順序に従って一つが他ののちに興るのであるが、いくつかの点では同じ領土を占めることになっていた。今や現れる獣の特異な性格、角の数、新しい角の生え出でること、獣の威勢と恐怖、その支配が地の上で長く続いたこと——これらはダニエルの注意を引き、これを釘付けにした。それゆえ彼はこの動物の外観をより詳細に描写するに至り、また、幻のこの部分の意味について天使に説明を特に求める気持ちに駆られたのである (Daniel 7:19)。
見よ、第四の獣が——この獣には独特の特徴があり、そのすべては象徴的なものと見なされた。そして、その象徴の性格と意味とを正しく理解するためには、そのすべてが説明を要する。
前の三つの獣に関してそうであったように、これに関しても、まず象徴の様々な部分が持つ意味を説明し、それから解説の部分 (Daniel 7:19以下) においてその適用を調べるのが適切であろう。この象徴の細部は、前のどの象徴よりも数多く、より印象的で、より重要である。これらの細部は以下の通りである (Daniel 7:7-11)。
(a)動物そのもの (Daniel 7:7)。「第四の獣は恐ろしく、恐ろしくて、はなはだしく強い」。獣の形態ないし性質は、前の場合——獅子、熊、豹——のようには与えられておらず、想像力が補って満たすのに任されている。それは他のどの獣よりも外観において恐ろしく、単一の名称では指し示しえない怪物であったことに明らかである。ここで獣を描写するのに用いられている語——「恐ろしい」「恐るべき」「はなはだしく強い」——はほとんど同義語であり、この獣が呼び起こす恐怖を印象的に示すために積み重ねられている。これの一般的な意味には疑いの余地がない。(Daniel 7:23) において、「全地を食らい、これを踏みつけ、これをかみ砕く」王国を指すものと説明されているからである。象徴として、これは、前のいずれよりもはるかに恐ろしく、はるかに畏怖されるべき、より広い支配権を持ち、性格においてより峻厳でより抑圧的であり、要求においてより苛烈で、他の自由をより完全に破壊するような、何らかの強国を示すものであろう。術策と狡猾によってよりも、力と恐怖によって前進することのほうが多い強国である。この特徴は象徴の全体を通じて明らかである。
(b)歯 (Daniel 7:7)。「大きな鉄の歯を持っていた」。ほかの動物が持っているような単なる歯や牙ではなく、鉄で造られた歯である。これは怪物の特徴であり、ここに象徴された支配に何か非常に特異なものがあることを示している。歯は食べるため、すなわち呑み込むために役立つ。ここにあるのは、そのような歯を持つ猛烈な怪物が、その前にあるすべてのものを引き裂き、あるいは呑み尽くすであろうという、貪り食うこと、引き裂くことの象徴である。これもまた、きわめて猛烈な、野蛮な残虐さを持つ国、他のすべての国にとって著しく恐るべき国を示すものである。例解として、(Jeremiah 15:12; Micah 4:13) と比較せよ。(Daniel 7:23) で説明されているように、これが示す王国は「全地を食らう」のである。歯——大きな歯——は、残虐さ、あるいは呑み尽くす敵の象徴としてしばしば用いられる。こうして (Proverbs 30:14) には「剣のような歯を持つ世代があり、その奥歯はナイフのようである。地から貧しい者を、人の子らの中から乏しい者を食べ尽くすために」とある。ダビデもまた、暴君たちの残虐さを表すためにこの語を用いる。(Psalm 3:7)「あなたは悪者の歯を折られた」。(Psalm 57:4)「彼らの歯は槍また矢」。(Psalm 58:6)「彼らの口の中の歯を打ち砕いてください。若獅子の大歯を折ってください」。
(c)足による踏みつけ (Daniel 7:7)。「それは食らい、かみ砕き、その残りをその足で踏みつけた」。すなわち、猛烈な怪物のように、呑み尽くしえないものは何であれ、それを地に踏みつけて粉砕したのである。これは、破壊自体のために、あるいは他のいかなる目的も達しえないところでの破壊をも行おうとする性向ないし目的を示す。憤怒と激怒、その途上にあるすべてを打ち砕いて普遍的支配を得ようとする決意を表し、単にそうすること自体のために、あるいは自らには何の利益も期待できない場合においてすら、他の者が存在して自由を享受することを望まないがゆえに、他を服従させ粉砕する国に当てはまるものであろう。
(d)自分に先立つすべてのものと異なっていたという事実 (Daniel 7:7)。「そしてそれは、自分に先立つすべての獣と異なっていた」。預言者は、その外観を描写しようとはしていないので、どのような点で異なっていたのかを特に明示していない。獅子でも熊でも豹でもなかったが、正確に何であったかは述べていない。おそらく、比較しうる動物が存在しないほどの怪物であったのであろう。しかし、十の角、小さな角、鉄の歯などの点での相違はいくつか述べており、それでも全体の絵は想像力が補うに任されている。この意味は必ずや、この獣によって象徴される第四の王国が、それに先立つ諸王国と本質的に異なっているであろうということ、したがって我々は、他のものと異ならせる特徴のうちにその成就を探さねばならないということである。相違には何か著しいもの——諸国間の通常の相違を超えるもの——がなければならない。
(e)十の角 (Daniel 7:7)。「十の角を持っていた」。すなわち、預言者は、この獣を特徴づけるものとして、その上に十の角を見たのである。角は力の象徴であり、ダニエル書 (Daniel 7:7-8, 20, 24; 8:3-9, 20-22) とヨハネの黙示録 (Revelation 5:6; 13:1, 11; 17:3, 12, 16) において、表徴ないし象徴としてしばしば用いられている。角を持つ動物の大きな力がそこにあるために、象徴として用いられるのである。こうして (Amos 6:13) には、 「むなしいものを喜び、 『我々は自分の力で 支配を取ったではないか』と言う者たちよ」 (ヘブル語では「角」。)とある。(Deuteronomy 33:17) にも、 「その美しさは若い雄牛のよう、 その角は野牛の角のよう。 これをもって諸国の民を突き、 地の果てに至らせよう。 これはエフライムの万々、 マナセの千々である」 ——ウェミス。とある。(1 Kings 22:11) では、偽預言者ゼデキヤによる象徴的な行為に角が用いられているのを見る。「彼は鉄の角を作って言った。『主はこう仰せられる。これらをもってスリヤ人を突き、彼らを絶ち滅ぼすまで突き通せ』」。(Zechariah 1:18) では、預言者に見られた四つの角は、ユダヤ人を散らし、荒廃させた四つの大いなる強国であるとされている。ウェミス『聖書の象徴的言語の鍵』の「角」の項と比較せよ。ここでの象徴の意味については疑いの余地がない。この章の後の部分 (Daniel 7:24) で「あの十の角はこれから起こる十人の王である」と説明されているからである。その説明からまた、彼らは、その王国の歴史のいつかの時期にその王国から「起こる」、すなわち湧き出る十人の王であったことになるように思われる。「この王国から出たあの十の角は、これから起こる十人の王である」——すなわち、その王国自体が、合併あるいは統合されて一つとなった他の十の王国から出てくるのではなく、その一つの王国から、支配を行う十のもの、あるいはその一つの王国の力が最終的に宿る十のものが湧き出るという意味である。ダニエルが初めて獣を見たとき、これらの角はすでに獣に属するものとして見えたように見えるが、後の説明によれば、これらの角は、その一つの王国の力が最終的に行使されるあり方の表徴、あるいは十人の王ないし王朝がそこから湧き出ることを示すものである。それゆえ我々が自然に期待すべきは、諸国を打ち砕く巨大な力の一つの大王国においてこの成就を見出すことであり、そこでは同じ一般的特徴が保たれつつ、力が集中することになる十人の王、王朝、王国がそこから湧き出るのである。
(f)小さな角の生え出でること (Daniel 7:8)。「私がそれらの角に注意していると、見よ、そのうちから、もう一つの別の小さな角が出てきた」。これに関しては、いくつかの点に注意を要する。
(1)彼が「それらの角に注意していた」という事実。すなわち、もう一つの角がそれらのうちから出てくるまで、見つめていたということである。これは、初めて怪物を見たときにはそのような角はなく、初めて見たときから相当の時間を経てその角が出てきたことを含意する——象徴された王国の歴史のかなり後のほうで、おそらくは起こることであろうことを暗示する。それはすぐに起こる事柄ではないことが含意されている。
(2)それはほかの角たちの「うちに」(ביניהן bēynēyhēn)出てきた。同じ源から始まり、同じ動物に属するのであるから、同じ力の発展ないし発現である。ここで用いられている語は、それが占めていた正確な位置を何ら確実には示してはいない。しかし、ほかの角たちは互いに接近して立ち、この角は中央から、あるいはまさにそれらのまっただ中から出てきたように見える——象徴された新しい支配が外国からの支配ではなく、王国自身から湧き出るもの、あるいは王国の中で育つように見えるものであることを含意する。
(3)それは小さな角であった。すなわち、初めは小さかったが、その後、大きな力を象徴しうるほどに生長した。これは、象徴された力が初めは小さく、徐々に湧き出てくることを示す。このことの成就は、征服においてでも、革命においてでも、王朝の変更においてでも、憲法の突然の変更においてでもなく、出自が卑しく、初めは弱々しく小さいが、徐々に増大して、自らの成長によって、それまで行使されていた力の一部を押し退け、その場所を占めるに至るような、何らかの力のうちに見出されるであろう。我々が自然に期待すべきは、卑しい出身から始まって徐々に発展し、ついには怪物によって象徴された王国に本来属していた権威の相当部分を吸収する、国家内部の何らかの力の増大のうちに、この成就を見出すことである。
(4)その「角」の生長に際して、ほかの角の三つが根こそぎ抜かれた。これを表現するのに用いられている語(אתעקרו 'ethe‛ăqârâv)の適切な意味は、それらが根絶やしにされた——木が根ごと倒されるように、あるいは根が土から引き抜かれるように——ということである。これがなされた過程は、生長によるものであったように見える。角の漸進的な増大がほかの角たちを圧迫したので、その一部は押し出されて倒れた。これが正当に示しているのは、いかなる暴力行為でも、突然の激動や革命でもなく、元の力の一部が取り除かれ、この新しい力がその場所を占めるほどに、力が漸進的に生長したことである。厳密な意味での革命はなく、王朝全体の変更もなかった。角の大部分は残っていたからである。ただ、以前には他の者たちが行使していた力の一部を、今ではその身代わりとして行使するに至った、新しい力の漸進的な興起があっただけである。数の三は、十のうちの三部分がこのように吸収されたことか、あるいは、相当ではあるが不定の部分がこのように吸収されたことを示すものであろう。
(5)目。「見よ、この角には人間の目のような目があった」。目は知性を表す。我々が目の助けによって物を見るからである。エゼキエルの幻における輪の縁は目で満ちており (Ezekiel 1:18)、知性の象徴であった。これは、ここで述べられている力が注目すべきほど抜け目ないものであることを示す。我々が自然に期待すべきは、計画を賢明かつ知的に立て、政策について大きく明瞭な見通しを持ち、その諮問と目的において抜け目なく先見の明があり、外交に熟達し、あるいは政治家的な計画によって卓越した力のうちに、この成就を見出すことである。この部分の象徴が単独で立っているならば、賢明で抜け目ないどんな行政においても成就を見出しえたであろうが、ほかのものに囲まれてここに立っている以上、それらと対照して、政策において抜け目なく先を見通すことに特徴があったことを示すように思われる。レンガーケはヒエロニムスに従い、「人間の目は他の動物の目よりも鋭く鋭敏である」から、ここで指されている対象は人間であることを意味する、と考える。しかし、上に述べた解釈——知性、抜け目なさ、明察を表すという解釈——のほうがより正しい。
(6)口。「大きなことを語る口」。高ぶりと傲慢とを示す口である。(Daniel 7:25) において、これは、それが指す者が「いと高き方に逆らってことばを語る」こと、すなわち冒涜の罪を犯すことになるという意味だと説明されている。かような傲慢、かような主張、かような精神が示されるので、それは実際上、神に逆らって語ることとなるであろう。我々が自然に期待すべきは、高ぶった冒涜的な何らかの力、実際に宗教を冒涜し、世における宗教の進展と繁栄に敵対する何らかの力のうちに、この成就を見出すことである。七十人訳のうちキシアヌス写本は、ここに「聖徒たちに戦いを挑む」という語を付け加えているが、これらの語はカルデア語原典には見出されない。とはいえ、(Daniel 7:25) の説明とはよく調和している。ここで考察してきた事柄は、(Daniel 7:11) で述べられている事実——獣が殺され、その体が燃える炎に渡されたという事実——を除けば、第四の獣という象徴に本来属するすべてを含んでいる。成就に関する問いは、ダニエルの願いによって天使が (Daniel 7:19-25) で与えている説明を考察する際に扱うのが適切であろう。
Original em inglês
After this I saw in the night visions - The other beasts were seen also in a dream Daniel 7:1, and this probably in the same night, though as a subsequent part of the dream, for the whole vision evidently passed before the prophet in a single dream. The succession, or the fact that he saw one after the other, indicates a sucession in the kingdoms. They were not to be at the same time upon the earth, but one was to arise after another in the order here indicated, though they were in some respects to occupy the same territory. The singular character of the beast that now appears; the number of the horns; the springing up of a new horn; the might and terror of the beast, and the long duration of its dominion upon the earth, attracted and fixed the attention of Daniel, led him into a more minute description of the appearance of the animal, and induced him particularly to ask an explanation of the angel of the meaning of this part of the vision, Daniel 7:19.
And, behold, a fourth beast - This beast had peculiar characteristics, all of which were regarded as symbolic, and all of which demand explanation in order that we may have a just view of the nature and design of the symbol.
As in reference to the three former beasts, so also in regard to this, it will be proper to explain first the significance of the different parts of the symbol, and then in the exposition (Daniel 7:19, following) to inquire into the application. The particulars of this symbol are more numerous, more striking, and more important than in either of the previous ones. These particulars are the following Daniel 7:7-11 :
(a) The animal itself Daniel 5:7 : "a fourth beast, dreadful and terrible, and strong exceedingly." The form or nature of the beast is not given as in the preceding cases - the lion, the bear, and the leopard - but it is left for the imagination to fill up. It was a beast more terrific in its appearance than either of the others, and was evidently a monster such as could not be designated by a single name. The terms which are used here in describing the beast - "dreadful, terrible, exceedingly strong," are nearly synonymous, and are heaped together in order to give an impressive view of the terror inspired by the beast. There can be no doubt as to the general meaning of this, for it is explained Daniel 7:23 as denoting a kingdom that "should devour the whole earth, and tread it down, and break it in pieces." As a symbol, it would denote some power much more fearful and much more to be dreaded; having a wider dominion; and more stern, more oppressive in its character, more severe in its exactions, and more entirely destroying the liberty of others; advancing more by power and terror, and less by art and cunning, than either. This characteristic is manifest throughout the symbol.
(b) The teeth Daniel 7:7 : "and it had great iron teeth." Not only teeth or tusks, such as other animals may have, but teeth made of iron. This is characteristic of a monster, and shows that there was to be something very peculiar in the dominion that was here symbolized. The teeth are of use to eat or devour; and the symbol here is that of devouring or rending - as a fierce monster with such teeth might be supposed to rend or devour all that was before it. This, too, would denote a nation exceedingly fierce; a nation of savage ferocity; a nation that would be signally formidable to all others. For illustration, compare Jeremiah 15:12; Micah 4:13. As explained in Daniel 7:23, it is said that the kingdom denoted by this would "devour the whole earth." Teeth - great teeth, are often used as the symbols of cruelty, or of a devouring enemy. Thus in Proverbs 30:14 : "There is a generation whose teeth are as swords, and their jaw teeth are as knives, to devour the poor from off the earth, and the needy from among men." So David uses the word to denote the cruelty of tyrants: Psalm 3:7, "Thou hast broken the teeth of the ungodly;" Psalm 57:4, "whose teeth are spears and arrows;" Psalm 58:6, "break their teeth in their mouth; break out the great teeth of the young lions."
(c) The stamping with the feet Daniel 7:7 : "it devoured and brake in pieces, and stamped the residue with the feet of it." That is, like a fierce monster, whatever it could not devour it stamped down and crushed in the earth. This indicates a disposition or purpose to destroy, for the sake of destroying, or where no other purpose could be gained. It denotes rage, wrath, a determination to crush all in its way, to have universal dominion; and would be applicable to a nation that subdued and crushed others for the mere sake of doing it, or because it was unwilling that any other should exist and enjoy liberty - even where itself could not hope for any advantage.
(d) The fact that it was different from all that went before it Daniel 7:7 : "and it was diverse from all the beasts that were before it." The prophet does not specify particularly in what respects it was different, for he does not attempt to give its appearance. It was not a lion, a bear, or a leopard, but he does not say precisely what it was. Probably it was such a monster that there were no animals with which it could be compared. He states some circumstances, however, in which it was different - as in regard to the ten horns, the little horn, the iron teeth, etc., but still the imagination is left to fill up the picture in general. The meaning of this must be, that the fourth kingdom, represented by this beast, would be materially different from those which preceded it, and we must look for the fulfillment in some features that would characterize it by which it would be unlike the others. There must be something marked in the difference - something that would be more than the common difference between nations.
(e) The ten horns Daniel 7:7 : "and it had ten horns." That is, the prophet saw on it ten horns as characterizing the beast. The horn is a symbol of power, and is frequently so used as an emblem or symbol in Daniel Dan 7:7-8, Daniel 7:20, Daniel 7:24; Daniel 8:3-9, Daniel 8:20-22 and Revelation Rev 5:6; Revelation 13:1, Revelation 13:11; Revelation 17:3, Revelation 17:12, Revelation 17:16. It is used as a symbol because the great strength of horned animals is found there. Thus in Amos 6:13, it is said:
"Ye that rejoice in a thing of nought,
That say, Have we not taken dominion to ourselves By our own strength?"
(Heb. horns.)
So in Deuteronomy 33:17 :
"His beauty shall be that of a young bull,
And his horns shall be the horns of a rhinoceros:
With these he shall push the people to the extremities of the land:
Such are the ten thousands of Ephraim,
Such the thousands of Manasseh."
- Wemyss.
So in 1 Kings 22:11, we find horns used in a symbolic action on the part of the false prophet Zedekiah. "He made him horns of iron, and said, Thus saith Jehovah, With these shalt thou push the Syrians, until thou have consumed them." In Zechariah 1:18, the four horns that are seen by the prophet are said to be the four great powers which had scattered and wasted the Jews. Compare Wemyss on the Symbolic Language of Scripture, art. "Horns." There can be no doubt as to the meaning of the symbol here, for it is explained in a subsequent part of the chapter Daniel 7:24, "the ten horns are the ten kings that shall arise." It would seem also, from that explanation, that they were to be ten kings that would "arise" or spring out of that kingdom at some period of its history. "And the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kings that shall arise;" that is, not that the kingdom itself would spring out of ten others that would be amalgamated or consolidated into one, but that out of that one kingdom there would spring up ten that would exercise dominion, or in which the power of the one kingdom would be ultimately lodged. Though Daniel appears to have seen these horns as pertaining to the beast when he first saw him, yet the subsequent explanation is, that these horns were emblems of the manner in which the power of that one kingdom would be finally exerted; or that ten kings or dynasties would spring out of it. We are, then, naturally to look for the fulfillment of this in some one great kingdom of huge power that would crush the nations, and from which, while the same general characteristic would remain, there would spring up ten kings, or dynasties, or kingdoms, in which the power would be concentrated.
(f) The springing up of the little horn Daniel 7:8 : "I considered the horns, and, behold, there came up among them another little horn." There are several points to be noticed in regard to this:
(1) The fact that he "considered the horns;" that is, he looked on them until another sprang up among them. This implies that when he first saw the monster, it had no such horn, and that the horn sprang up a considerable time after he first saw it - intimating that it would occur, perhaps, far on in the history of the kingdom that was symbolized. It is implied that it was not an event which would soon occur.
(2) It sprang up "among" the others (ביניהן bēynēyhēn) - starting from the same source, and pertaining to the same animal, and therefore a development or putting forth of the same power. The language used here does not designate, with any degree of certainty, the precise place which it occupied, but it would seem that the others stood close together, and that this sprang out of the center, or from the very midst of them - implying that the new dominion symbolized would not be a foreign dominion, but one that would spring out of the kingdom itself, or that would seem to grow up in the kingdom.
(3) It was a little horn; that is, it was small at first, though subsequently it grew so as to be emblematic of great power. This would denote that the power symbolized would be small at first - springing up gradually. The fulfillment of this would be found, neither in conquest nor in revolution, nor in a change of dynasty, nor in a sudden change of a constitution, but in some power that had an obscure origin, and that was feeble and small at the beginning, yet gradually increasing, until, by its own growth, it put aside a portion of the power before exercised and occupied its place. We should naturally look for the fulfillment of this in the increase of some power within the state that had a humble origin, and that slowly developed itself until it absorbed a considerable portion of the authority that essentially resided in the kingdom represented by the monster.
(4) In the growth of that "horn," three of the others were plucked up by the roots. The proper meaning of the word used to express this (אתעקרו 'ethe‛ăqârâv) is, that they were rooted out - as a tree is overturned by the roots, or the roots are turned out from the earth. The process by which this was done seems to have been by growth. The gradual increase of the horn so crowded on the others that a portion of them was forced out, and fell. What is fairly indicated by this was not any act of violence, or any sudden convulsion or revolution, but such a gradual growth of power that a portion of the original power was removed, and this new power occupied its place. There was no revolution, properly so-called; no change of the whole dynasty, for a large portion of the horns remained, but the gradual rise of a new power that would wield a portion of that formerly wielded by others, and that would now wield the power in its place. The number three would either indicate that three parts out of the ten were absorbed in this way, or that a considerable, though an indefinite portion, was thus absorbed.
(5) The eyes: "and behold, in this horn were eyes like the eyes of a man." Eyes denote intelligence, as we see objects by their aid. The rims of the wheels in Ezekiel's vision were full of eyes Ezekiel 1:18, as symbolic of intelligence. This would denote that the power here referred to would be remarkably sagacious. We should naturally look for the fulfillment of this in a power that laid its plans wisely and intelligently; that had large and clear views of policy; that was shrewd and far-seeing in its counsels and purposes; that was skilled in diplomacy; or, that was eminent for statesman-like plans. This part of the symbol, if it stood alone, would find its fulfillment in any wise and shrewd administration; as it stands here, surrounded by others, it would seem that this, as contrasted with them, was characteristically shrewd and far-seeing in its policy. Lengerke, following Jerome, supposes that this means that the object referred to would be a man, "as the eyes of men are keener and sharper than those of other animals." But the more correct interpretation is that above referred to - that it denotes intelligence, shrewdness, sagacity.
(6) The mouth: "and a mouth speaking great things." A mouth indicating pride and arrogance. This is explained in Daniel 7:25, as meaning that he to whom it refers would "speak great words against the Most High;" that is, would be guilty of blasphemy. There would be such arrogance, and such claims set up, and such a spirit evinced, that it would be in fact a speaking against God. We naturally look for the fulfillment of this to some haughty and blaspheming power; some power that would really blaspheme religion, and that would be opposed to its progress and prosperity in the world. The Septuagint, in the Codex Chisianus, adds here, "and shall make war against the saints;" but these words are not found in the original Chaldee. They accord, however, well with the explanation in Daniel 7:25. What has been here considered embraces all that pertains properly to this symbol - the symbol of the fourth beast - except the fact stated in Daniel 7:11, that the beast was slain, and that his body was given to the burning flame. The inquiry as to the fulfillment will be appropriate when we come to consider the explanation given at the request of Daniel, by the angel, in Daniel 7:19-25.
9
Daniel 7:9
日本語
私は見ていた——「私はこれらの不思議な光景を見続け、これらの変転を熟考していた」。ここには、これらの事がすべて起こるまでに、ある程度の時間が経過したことが含意されている。彼は、この第四の獣の上に特に厳粛なさばきが下るのを見るまで、見続けたのである。あたかも神が、その威厳と栄光のうちに進み出て、そのさばきを宣告し、獣の権力と高ぶりに終わりをもたらされるかのようであった。
王座が据えられるまで——カルデア語(כרסון kâresâvân)は、本来、王座、すなわち君主たちが着座する座を意味する。この語自体については、地の君主の占める王座にも、神の王座にも、等しく当てはまる。ここで複数形が用いられていることは、少なくとも、神の王座だけを指すのではなく、いくつかの別の王座をも指すことを含意するように見える。マウラーとレンガーケは、ここでの言及は、宣告されるべき厳粛なさばきにおいて天の存在たちが着座した諸王座——すなわち神の王座と、神とともにその厳粛なさばきに臨むために来る天の住民たちの王座ないし座席——に対するものだと考える。レンガーケは、例解として 1 Kings 22:19; Isaiah 6:1; Job 1:6; Revelation 5:11-12 を挙げている。しかし、この語自体は、神の王座に対すると同様に、地の君主たちの王座にも正当に適用され得るものである。私たちの訳における「投げ落とされた」(רמיו remı̂yv) という句は、この時期に何らかの王座の投げ倒しないし転覆があり、厳粛なさばきがこれに従い、あるいはこれの結果として来ることを前提としているかのように見える。
ゲゼニウスの説明によれば、カルデア語(רמא remâh)は、投げる、投げ込むことを意味し(Daniel 3:21, Daniel 3:24; Daniel 6:16-17)、また、据える、置くこと——たとえば王座を——、貢ぎ物を課すこと(Ezra 7:24)をも意味する。この箇所は、ラテン語ヴルガートでは throni positi sunt——「王座が据えられた」——と訳され、ギリシャ語では ἐτέθησαν etethēsan——「置かれた」——と訳されている。ルターも Stühle gesetzt、レンガーケも Stühle aufgestellt——王座が据えられた、備え付けられた——と訳す。それゆえ、この句の正当な意味は、私たちの訳のように、歴史のこの特定の時期を画すものとして地の「王座が投げ落とされる」ことにあるのではなく、幻のうちに、獣などに対してさばきを行う目的のために王座が設けられ、据えられたということにあるように思われる。複数形の使用は、疑いなく、ほかの箇所で用いられる言語と調和して、大いなるさばきつかさが、公義を執行するのに、いわば共に加わるほかの者たち——御使いたち、あるいは贖われた霊たち——に囲まれるであろうという事実を示すものである。
ほかの者たちがこのように神とともに人々の上にさばきを宣告する者として表されていることは、聖書においてこの上なく普通のことである。(Matthew 19:28; Luke 22:30; 1 Corinthians 6:2-3; 1 Timothy 5:21; Revelation 2:26; Revelation 4:4) と比較せよ。それゆえ、ここに印される時代ないし時期は、「獣」の上に厳粛な神のさばきが下るとき、あるいはそのようなさばきが宣告されたかのような何らかの出来事が起こるときである。第四の獣に関する出来事は、聖徒たちの統治ないしメシアの御国の樹立に先立つ一連の出来事のうちの最後のものとなるはずであり、それゆえ、厳粛なさばきの場面が起こるかのように、この仕方で導入されているのである。
そして、年を経た方が座に着かれた——さばきのために着座されたのである。「年を経た方」という句——יומין עתיק ‛attı̂yq yômı̂yn——は、年を経た人ないし老人を表す語であり、日数において最も古い方を意味し、フランス語の L'Eternel、英語の The Eternal、すなわち「永遠なる方」に相当する。これは Daniel 7:9, Daniel 7:13, Daniel 7:22 にのみ現れ、年月を経て尊敬に値する方が、さばきのために着座する姿の表現である。この称号それ自体は永遠性を意味するものではないが、おそらくは神が永遠であられるという事実に照らして用いられている。神はしばしばこのような称号の下に表される——「世々から世々まで」います方(Psalm 90:2)、「初めであり終わり」である方(Isaiah 44:6)等々。ここでの言及が、さばきつかしとしての、さばきを宣告しようとなさる神を指していることは疑いを容れない。とはいえ、ここで象徴によって表されるすべてのことが文字どおり起こると考える必要がないのと同様に、これが目に見える文字通りの形で行われると想定する必要もないのである。
もし正当な解釈は、ここに記述されたような文字的で目に見えるさばきの存在を要求すると固執されるなら、同じ厳格な解釈は、文字どおりの「獣の殺害と、その体の炎への引き渡し」(Daniel 7:11)を、さらに一般的に言えば、ここで象徴によって言及されるすべての事柄の文字通りの成立をさえ要求することになろう、と答えることができる。しかし事実は、これらの出来事はすべて象徴によって言及されているのである。象徴は表現力豊かな意味を持つが、その本性と趣旨自体によって、文字どおりに理解されてはならない。ここで公正に含意されるのは、この第四の獣に関して、あたかも神が厳粛なさばきの座に着き、ここで言及される仕方でそれを罪に定めるかのような出来事が起こる、ということにすぎない。私たちはこの成就において、この事案に対する神のさばきとみなされ得るほど決定的で著しい性格を持つ出来事、あるいは、さばきの座が正式に設けられ、神が威厳のうちに現れて判決を下されるかのように、神の強く示された不承認を表す出来事を、疑いなく探し求めるべきである。着座することは、古代においても現代におけると同様に、さばきを宣告する際の通常の姿勢であった。古代においては、さばきつかさは王座ないし腰掛に着座し、当事者たちはその前に立った(Zechariah 4:13 と比較せよ)。また、ギリシャ人とローマ人とのあいだでは、着座した姿勢がさばきつかさにとってあまりにも本質的であったため、ほかのいかなる姿勢においても宣告された判決は無効であったという(レンガーケ)。格言には「Animus sedendo magis sapit」——心は座してこそ、いっそう知恵を働かせる——といい、また『アエネーイス』第1巻56行の注解者セルウィウスも、「Est enim curantis et solliciti sedere」——心を配り、気を遣う者の常として、座するものである——と述べている。
その衣は雪のように白かった——その長衣のことである。ここでの言及は、古代の君主、貴族、あるいは祭司たちが着た、長く垂れる衣に対するものである。(Isaiah 6:1) の注解を見よ。(Revelation 1:13) の注解と比較せよ。白は純潔と名誉の象徴であり、さばきつかさの純潔と、彼の下す判決の公正さの象徴として、不適切なものではなかった。それゆえ大ピットは、アメリカの人々との戦争にインディアンを用いることに反対したその有名な演説において、主教たちに「その亜麻布の汚れのない純潔をもって介入されたし」と懇願した。レンガーケは、スチュアート教授が (Revelation 1:13) でするとおり、ここで言う白さは、衣の素材の単なる色ではなく、いなずまないし火のような天の光彩ないし輝きであり、神の威厳にふさわしいものであると考える。レンガーケはここで Exodus 19:18-24; Daniel 2:22; Matthew 17:2; 1 Timothy 6:16; エスドラス第二書 7:55; 『イザヤの昇天』 8:21-25; Revelation 1:13-14; Revelation 4:2-4 を参照する。しかしより正しい解釈は、これが、さばきつかさたちの着るにふさわしい純白の衣を指し、その職務の象徴として不適切でないものであったと考えることであろう。
その頭の毛は、混じりけのない羊毛のようであった——すなわち、白さにおいて。年を経て尊敬に値する姿の特徴である。(Revelation 1:14) の注解と比較せよ。ここに私たちの前に置かれている像は、年月と知恵とによって尊敬に値する方である。
その王座は炎のようであった——彼の着座されたその座は、火のように見えた。すなわち、炎の塊であるかのように、輝かしく華麗であった。
その車輪は燃える火のようであった——その王座の車輪のことである。Ezekiel 第1章、第10章にあるとおり、エホバが着座された王座は、車輪の上にあるように見えたからである。Ezekiel 1:16 と Ezekiel 10:9 では、王座の車輪は緑柱石の色、すなわち宝石のようであった。ここでは、おそらく単に炎の様子を呈していたのであろう——そのような車輪は、燃える炎を閃かせるかのように見えたであろう。ミルトンも、神の御子の戦車をこう描写している。
「渦巻く風の音とともに突き進んだ、 父なる神の戦車が。 引かれることなしに、車輪の中の車輪は密なる炎を閃かせ、 それ自体が霊を宿して生き、四つのケルビムの姿に護られて進んだ。 それぞれ四つの顔を持ち、驚くべきものであり、 星のように、その身も翼も ことごとく目で飾られ、緑柱石の車輪にも目がはめ込まれ、 そのあいだを燃える火が駆けめぐった。」 ——『失楽園』第6巻。
Original em inglês
I beheld - "I continued looking on these strange sights, and contemplating these transformations." This implies that some time elapsed before all these things had occurred. He looked on until he saw a solemn judgment passed on this fourth beast particularly, as if God had come forth in his majesty and glory to pronounce that judgment, and to bring the power and arrogance of the beast to an end.
Till the thrones were cast down - The Chaldee word (כרסון kâresâvân) means, properly, thrones - seats on which monarchs sit. So far as the word is concerned, it would apply either to a throne occupied by an earthly monarch, or to the throne of God. The use of the plural here would seem to imply, at least, that the reference is not to the throne of God, but to some other throne. Maurer and Lengerke suppose that the allusion is to the thrones on which the celestial beings sat in the solemn judgment that was to be pronounced - the throne of God, and the thrones or seats of the attending inhabitants of heaven, coming with him to the solemn judgment. Lengerke refers for illustration to 1 Kings 22:19; Isaiah 6:1; Job 1:6, and Revelation 5:11-12. But the word itself might be properly applied to the thrones of earthly monarchs as well as to the throne of God. The phrase "were cast down" (רמיו remı̂yv), in our translation, would seem to suppose that there was some throwing down, or overturning of thrones, at this period, and that the solemn judgment would follow this, or be consequent on this.
The Chaldee word (רמא remâh) means, as explained by Gesenius, to cast, to throw Daniel 3:21, Daniel 3:24; Daniel 6:16-17; to set, to place, e. g., thrones; to impose tribute Ezra 7:24. The passage is rendered by the Latin Vulgate, throni positi sunt - "thrones were placed;" by the Greek, ἐτέθησαν etethēsan - "were placed." So Luther, stuhle gesetzt; and so Lengerke, stuhle aufgestellt - the thrones were placed, or set up. The proper meaning, therefore, of the phrase would seem to be - not, as in our translation, that the "thrones would be cast down" - as if there was to be an overturning of thrones on the earth to mark this particular period of history - but that there was, in the vision, a setting up, or a placing of thrones for the purpose of administering judgment, etc., on the beast. The use of the plural is, doubtless, in accordance with the language elsewhere employed, to denote the fact that the great Judge would be surrounded with others who would be, as it were, associated in administering justice - either angels or redeemed spirits.
Nothing is more common in the Scripture than to represent others as thus associated with God in pronouncing judgment on men. Compare Matthew 19:28; Luke 22:30; 1 Corinthians 6:2-3; 1 Timothy 5:21; Revelation 2:26; Revelation 4:4. The era, or period, therefore, marked here, would be when a solemn Divine judgment was to be passed on the "beast," or when some events were to take place, as if such a judgment were pronounced. The events pertaining to the fourth beast were to be the last in the series preparatory to the reign of the saints, or the setting up of the kingdom of the Messiah, and therefore it is introduced in this manner, as if a solemn judgment scene were to occur.
And the Ancient of days did sit - Was seated for the purposes of judgment. The phrase "Ancient of days" - יומין עתיק ‛attı̂yq yômı̂yn - is one that denotes an elderly or old person; meaning, he who is most ancient as to days, and is equivalent to the French L'Eternel, or English, The Eternal. It occurs only in Daniel 7:9, Daniel 7:13, Daniel 7:22, and is a representation of one venerable in years, sitting down for the purposes of judgment. The appellation does not of itself denote eternity, but it is employed, probably, with reference to the fact that God is eternal. God is often represented under some such appellation, as he that is "from everlasting to everlasting" Psalm 90:2, "the first and the last" Isaiah 44:6, etc. There can be no doubt that the reference here is to God as a Judge, or as about to pronounce judgment, though there is no necessity for supposing that it will be in a visible and literal form, anymore than there is for supposing that all that is here represented by symbols will literally take place.
If it should be insisted on that the proper interpretation demands that there will be a literal and visible judgment, such as is here described, it may be replied that the same rigid interpretation would demand that there will be a literal "slaying of the beast, and a giving of his body to the flame" Daniel 7:11, and more generally still, that all that is here referred to by symbols will literally occur. The fact, however, is, that all these events are referred to by symbols - symbols which have an expressive meaning, but which, by their very nature and design, are not to be literally understood. All that is fairly implied here is, that events would occur in regard to this fourth beast as if God should sit in solemn judgment on it, and should condemn it in the manner here referred to. We are, doubtless, in the fulfillment of this - to look for some event that will be of so decisive and marked a character, that it may be regarded as a Divine judgment in the case, or that will show the strongly marked Divine disapprobation - as really as if the judgment-seat were formally set, and God should appear in majesty to give sentence. Sitting was the usual posture among the ancients, as it is among the moderns, in pronouncing judgment. Among the ancients the judge sat on a throne or bench while the parties stood before him (compare Zechariah 4:13), and with the Greeks and Romans so essential was the sitting posture for a judge, that a sentence pronounced in any other posture was not valid. - Lengerke. It was a maxim, Animus sedendo magis sapit; or, as Servius on the AEn. i. 56, remarks, Est enim curantis et solliciti sedere.
Whose garment was white as snow - Whose robe. The reference here is to the long flowing robe that was worn by ancient princes, noblemen, or priests. See the notes at Isaiah 6:1. Compare the notes at Revelation 1:13. White was an emblem of purity and honor, and was not an improper symbol of the purity of the judge, and of the justness of the sentence which he would pronounce. So the elder Pitt, in his celebrated speech against employing Indians in the war with the American people, besought the bishops to "interpose the unsullied purity of their lawn." Lengerke supposes, as Prof. Stuart does on Revelation 1:13, that the whiteness here referred to was not the mere color of the material of which the robe was made, but, was a celestial splendor or brightness, as if it were lightning or fire - such as is appropriate to the Divine Majesty. Lengerke refers here to Exodus 19:18-24; Daniel 2:22; Matthew 17:2; 1 Timothy 6:16; 2 Esdras 7:55; Ascension of Isaiah 8:21-25; Revelation 1:13-14; Revelation 4:2-4. But the more correct interpretation is to suppose that this refers to a pure white robe, such as judges might wear, and which would not be an improper symbol of their office.
And the hair of his head like the pure wool - That is, for whiteness - a characteristic of venerable age. Compare the notes at Revelation 1:14. The image here set before us is that of one venerable by years and wisdom.
His throne was like the fiery flame - The seat on which he sat seemed to be fire. That is, it was brilliant and splendid, as if it were a mass of flame.
And his wheels as burning fire - The wheels of his throne - for, as in Ezekiel 1; 10, the throne on which Jehovah sat appeared to be on wheels. In Ezekiel EZechariah 1:16; Ezekiel 10:9, the wheels of the throne appeared to be of the color of beryl; that is, they were like precious stones. Here, perhaps, they had only the appearance of a flame - as such wheels would seem to flash flames. So, Milton, in describing the chariot of the Son of God:
"Forth rush'd with whirlwind sound
The chariot of Paternal Deity,
Flashing thick flames, wheel within wheel undrawn,
Itself instinct with spirit, but convoyed
By four cherubic shapes; four faces each
Had wondrous; as with stars their bodies all,
And wings were set with eyes; with eyes the wheels
Of beryl, and careering fires between."
- Par. Lost, b. vi.
10
Daniel 7:10
日本語
「火の川が流れ出て、御前から出て来た」——火の流れが彼の王座から噴き出すかのように見えた、という表現である。この種の表現は、神の威厳と栄光を描き出すために聖書に数多く見られる。「王座からいなずまと、声と、雷鳴とが出ていた」(Revelation 4:5) と比較せよ。Exodus 19:16; Habakkuk 3:4; Psalm 18:8 も参照せよ。
「千の千が御前に仕えた」——「千の千」、すなわち千に千を掛け合わせた数である。まず数千の者が臨席しているという事実が心を打ち、次いで、その数千が千倍されたのと同じほどにその数が大きく感じられる。途方もない、数えきれない大群衆を意味する。ここで言及されているのは天使たちであり、神がこの世界に降りて来られるとき、この天の存在たちの大群が付き従う姿としてしばしば描かれている。Deuteronomy 33:2 には「主は聖なる者たちの万を率いて来られた」とあり、これは聖なる者たちを意味する。Psalm 68:17 には「神の戦車は二万、数千の天使たちである」とある。Jude 1:14 も比較せよ。「仕えた」という言葉は、彼らがその方に仕えていたことを意味する。
「万の万が御前に立っていた」——数えきれない大群衆である。彼らはさばかれるべき者たちではなく、その方が判決を宣告される際に仕える者たちであった。ここで言及されているさばきは世全体に対するものではなく、人の子のような方に王国を与える前の、獣に対するさばきであった (Daniel 7:13-14)。
「さばきが設けられた」——荘厳なさばきの行為に必要なすべての準備が整えられ、さばきの手続きが始まった、という意味である。
「書物が開かれた」——さばかれる者たちの行いの記録を収めた書物としてである。Revelation 20:12 と比較せよ。大いなるさばき主は、判決を下すべきすべての行いの記録を御前に置き、それらの行いに従って判決を下そうとしておられる姿として描かれている。ここで言及されているさばきは、長いあいだ世界を支配してきた権力から聖徒たちへと世界の支配権を移す、神による何らかの荘厳な行為であったと思われる。すでに指摘したように、この箇所の必須的な解釈は、これを文字どおり目に見えるさばき、「年を経た方」の人格的な出現、「人の子のような方」がその方に正式に進み出ること (Daniel 7:13)、あるいは地上の王国を公けに目に見える形で彼に引き渡すこととして理解することを要求しない。これらのことはすべて幻のうちに預言者の心の前を過ぎ去ったのであり、それは象徴的な表現であること、また、その成就を見出すべきは、帝国の流れを変え、「獣」と「角」によって表された権力に終止符を打ち、その権力を他の手に渡すような何らかの出来事——そのような荘厳なさばきの行為が行われたかのように地上に大きな変化をもたらす出来事——においてあることを、覚えておかねばならない。この表現の性質は、人間の営みの中に起こる偉大で重大な変化、すなわち「獣」の権力を取り去り、支配権を他の手に移らせるような出来事の中に、この成就を探すことを要求する。成就については、(Daniel 7:26) の注解を参照せよ。
Original em inglês
A fiery stream issued and came forth from before him - Streams of fire seemed to burst forth from his throne. Representations of this kind abound in the Scriptures to illustrate the majesty and glory of God. Compare Revelation 4:5, "And out of the throne proceeded lightnings, and thunderings, and voices." Exodus 19:16; Habakkuk 3:4; Psalm 18:8.
Thousand thousands ministered unto him - "A thousand of thousands;" that is, thousands multiplied a thousand times. The mind is struck with the fact that there are thousands present - and then the number seems as great as if those thousands were multiplied a thousand times. The idea is that there was an immense - a countless host. The reference here is to the angels, and God is often represented as attended with great numbers of these celestial beings when he comes down to our world. Deuteronomy 33:2, "he came with ten thousands of saints;" that is, of holy ones. Psalm 68:17, "the chariots of God are twenty thousand, even thousands of angels." Compare Jde 1:14. The word "ministered" means that they attended on him.
And ten thousand times ten thousand stood before him - An innumerable host. These were not to be judged, but were attendants on him as he pronounced sentence. The judgment here referred to was not on the world at large, but on the beast, preparatory to giving the kingdom to the one who was like the Son of man Daniel 7:13-14.
The judgment was set - That is, all the arrangements for a solemn act of judgment were made, and the process of the judgment commenced.
And the books were opened - As containing the record of the deeds of those who were to be judged. Compare Revelation 20:12. The great Judge is represented as having before him the record of all the deeds on which judgment was to be pronounced, and to be about to pronounce sentence according to those deeds. The judgment here referred to seems to have been some solemn act on the part of God transferring the power over the world, from what had long swayed it, to the saints. As already remarked, the necessary interpretation of the passage does not require us to understand this of a literal and visible judgment - of a personal appearing of the "Ancient of days" - of a formal application to him by "one like the Son of man" Daniel 7:13 - or of a public and visible making over to him of a kingdom upon the earth. It is to be remembered that all this passed in vision before the mind of the prophet; that it is a symbolic representation; and that we are to find the fulfillment of this in some event changing the course of empire - putting a period to the power represented by the "beast" and the "horn," and causing that power to pass into other hands - producing a change as great on the earth as if such a solemn act of judgment were passed. The nature of the representation requires that we should look for the fulfillment of this in some great and momentous change in human affairs - some events that would take away the power of the "beast," and that would cause the dominion to pass into other hands. On the fulfillment, see the notes at Daniel 7:26.
11
Daniel 7:11
日本語
「そのとき私は、あの角が語る大きな言葉の声のゆえに見つめていた」——私はこれらの言葉に——その傲慢さ、横柄さ、高ぶりに——引きつけられた。そして、主にこれらのことのゆえに、あの獣に対する厳粛なさばきが行われるのを見たのである。ここでの幻を見た者の態度はこうである。彼は「角」が語り出す傲慢で高ぶった言葉を聞き、どのようなさばきが宣告されるのかを知ろうと、深い注意と切実な期待のうちに待っていた。彼は (Daniel 7:8) でその角が生え出て大きな力に成長し、大いなることを語るのを見ていた。次いで、すぐその後に厳粛で荘厳なさばきの備えを見、今やどのような判決が下されるのかを案じつつ待っていたのである。その結果は、この節の後半で述べられている。
「私は見た」——見続けた、ということである。これは、それが一挙になされたのではなく、ある程度の時間が経過したことを含意するように思われる。
「ついにその獣が殺されるまで」——第四の獣、すなわち十の角を持ち、その上に小さな角が生え出た獣のことである。これがさばきの結果であった。ここには、その獣が、生え出た角の語った言葉のゆえに殺されたこと、すなわちその象徴が表した高ぶりと傲慢さとが、獣を死に至らせた原因であったことが明らかに含意されている。だれがその獣を殺すのかは述べられていない。しかし自然な意味は、他の角たちのただ中に生え出た「角」の高ぶりと傲慢さのゆえに、神のさばきがその死をもたらす引き金となる、ということである。「獣」が地上に存在する強大な君主国を表し、「小さな角」がそこから興る新しい権力を表すとすれば、その成就は次のような事実の中に見出されるべきである。かつてそれほど強大で恐るべく、諸国を踏みにじったこの権力が、自らが主張した権威の性質のゆえに、神のさばきの下で最終的に滅ぼされる、ということである。私たちは、既存の支配権から新しい権力が興り、既存の支配権はなお残るものの、そこから出たものの傲慢と高ぶりのゆえに先の支配権を滅ぼさねばならないほどに新しい権力の支配を受ける、というような状態の中に、この成就を探さなければならない。言い換えれば、第四の獣に表された王国の滅亡は、小さな角に表されたものの傲慢のゆえに臨む、神のさばきとしてのものとなるであろう。
「その体は破壊され」——すなわち、ここに表された王国には、獣の体が破壊されるのと同じほどの滅びが臨む、という意味である。その王国の権力そのものが終わりに至るのである。
「燃える炎に与えられた」——焼き尽くされた、ということである。これは、獣によってここに象徴された権力が完全に滅ぼされることを、強い表現で示すものである。しかし、これがその成し遂げられる方式であるとか、火によってなされることだと考える必要はない。これらすべてが象徴であることを覚えるべきであり、象徴の一部を他の部分よりも文字どおりに取るべきではない。文字どおりの獣や十の角や小さな角が存在すると考えるのと同様に、文字どおりの焼き尽くす火がこの場合にあると考えるのも妥当でない。自然な意味は、火によって成し遂げられたかのような現実の滅亡、すなわち火が適切な象徴となるような滅亡があるであろう、ということである。ここでの言及は、おそらく、動物の死体がしばしば火によって焼き尽くされたという事実に基づいている。
Original em inglês
I beheld then, because of the voice of the great words which the horn spake - I was attracted by these words - by their arrogance, and haughtiness, and pride; and I saw that it was on account of these mainly that the solemn judgment proceeded against the beast. The attitude of the seer here is this - he heard arrogant and proud words uttered by the "horn," and he waited in deep attention, and in earnest expectation, to learn what judgment would be pronounced. He had seen Daniel 7:8 that horn spring up and grow to great power, and utter great things; he had then seen, immediately on this, a solemn and sublime preparation for judgment, and he now waited anxiously to learn what sentence would be pronounced. The result is stated in the subsequent part of the verse.
I beheld - I continued beholding. This would seem to imply that it was not done at once, but that some time intervened.
Even until the beast was slain - The fourth beast: what had the ten horns, and on which the little horn had sprung up. This was the result of the judgment. It is evidently implied here that the beast was slain on account of the words uttered by the horn that sprang up, or that the pride and arrogance denoted by that symbol were the cause of the fact that the beast was put to death. It is not said by whom the beast would be slain; but the fair meaning is, that the procuring cause of that death would be the Divine judgment, on account of the pride and arrogancy of the "horn" that sprang up in the midst of the others. If the "beast" represents a mighty monarchy that would exist on the earth and the "little horn" a new power that would spring out of that, then the fulfillment is to be found in such a fact as this - that this power, so mighty and terrible formerly, and that crushed down the nations, would, under the Divine judgment, be ultimately destroyed, on account of the nature of the authority claimed. We are to look for the accomplishment of this in some such state of things as that of a new power springing out of an existing dominion, that the existing dominion still remains, but was so much controlled by the new power, that it would be necessary to destroy the former on account of the arrogance and pride of what sprang from it. In other words, the destruction of the kingdom represented by the fourth beast would be, as a Divine judgment, on account of the arrogancy of that represented by the little horn.
And his body destroyed - That is, there would be a destruction of the kingdom here represented as much as there would be of the beast if his body was destroyed. The power of that kingdom, as such, is to come to an end.
And given to the burning flame - Consumed. This would represent, in strong terms, that the power here symbolized by the beast would be utterly destroyed. It is not, however, necessary to suppose that this is to be the mode in which it would be done, or that it would be by fire. It is to be remembered that all this is symbol, and no one part of the symbol should be taken literally more than another, nor is it congruous to suppose there would be a literal consuming fire in the case anymore than that there would be literally a beast, or ten horns, or a little horn, The fair meaning is, that there would be as real a destruction as if it were accomplished by fire; or a destruction of which fire would be the proper emblem. The allusion is here, probably, to the fact that the dead bodies of animals were often consumed by fire.
12
Daniel 7:12
日本語
「残りの獣たちについては」——彼らは交替させられたが、滅ぼされはしなかった。権力を奪われ、その猛々しさを鎮められながらも、なお存在を保っているものとして、ダニエルの幻の中に表れていたように思われる。あるいは、幻が過ぎ去るあいだのしばらくのあいだ、なお生きているように見えたのであろう。彼らは、第四の獣がそうであったように、切り倒され、破壊され、焼き尽くされはしなかった。
「彼らの支配権は取り去られたが」——彼らは交替させられた、すなわち、もはや権力を行使しなかった。彼らはもはや諸国民を支配している姿としては現れなかった。彼らはなお存在してはいたが、鎮められ、静まっていた。彼らを識別することはできたが、彼らの偉大さと壮麗さの時代に果たしていた目立った役割を、もはや演じてはいなかった。彼らの権力は過ぎ去ったのである。これは解釈が難しいことではない。私たちは当然、この成就を、最初の三つの獣が表す諸国民がなお存在し続け、その境界、習慣、言語において国民として識別しうるものの、彼らが振るっていた権力は他の手に移っていた、という事実の中に求めることになろう。
「しかし彼らの命は延ばされた」——傍注では、カルデア語のままに「命の延長が彼らに与えられた」となっている。すなわち、彼らは、厳粛なさばきの後の第四の獣の権力のように、完全に滅ぼされ、焼き尽くされはしなかったということである。その意味は、これらの王国には、しばらくのあいだ活力が残るであろうということである。彼らにはまだ命があった。彼らと第四の獣に表された王国との違いは、鎮められてはいるがなお生きている野獣と、殺されて焼かれた野獣とのあいだにある違いと同様であった。私たちはこの成就を、三つの獣が表す王国が鎮められて他のものに受け継がれ、しかもなお多少の国民的性格を保っていたのに対し、もう一つの王国は世俗の種類の後継者を持たず、その権力は完全に終わり、支配権はまるごと他の手に移った——それゆえその王国は、それ自体としては、存在することを完全にやめたと言いうる——というような事態の中に探すべきである。
「一時と一時期のあいだ」—— (Daniel 7:25) の注解と比較せよ。ここで言及される時は定かでない。用いられた句 (ועדן עד־זמן ‛ad-zeman ve‛ı̂ddân) は定まった期間を指す。原語のどちらの語も、指定された、あるいは任命された時を指すが、私たちの「時」という語がそうであるように、いずれもその期間の長さについて何も示さない。ルターはこれを「それぞれがどれだけ続くべきかについて、彼らには一つの時と時刻が定められていたからである」と訳す。グロティウスはこれを「神によって定められた時を超えて、彼らは続くことができなかった」という意味に解する。カルデア語の真の意味は、おそらく「一時、すなわち定められた時のあいだ」であろう。預言者の心はまず、彼らが生き続けているという事実に注がれ、次に、何らかの形で明らかにされている、それは定まった期間であるという事実に注がれる。おそらく幻の中で、彼は彼らが次々と死ぬか消えていくのを見たのであろう。しかし、ここで用いられた言葉には、彼らがどれだけ続きうるかを判断できるものは何もない。小さな角によって表された権力が続く期間は (Daniel 7:25) で説明されているが、最初の三つの獣によって表された権力の存在がどれだけ続くかを見極める手がかりはない。明らかなのは、それがしばらくの期間延ばされるが、それは定められ固定された期間である、ということだけである。
Original em inglês
As concerning the rest of the beasts - They had been superseded, but not destroyed. It would seem that they were still represented in vision to Daniel, as retaining their existence, though their power was taken away, and their fierceness subdued, or that they still seemed to remain alive for a time, or while the vision was passing. They were not cut down, destroyed, and consumed as the fourth beast was.
They had their dominion taken away - They were superseded, or they no longer exercised power. They no more appeared exerting a control over the nations. They still existed, but they were subdued and quiet. It was possible to discern them, but they no longer acted the conspicuous part which they had done in the days of their greatness and grandeur. Their power had passed away. This cannot be difficult of interpretation. We should naturally look for the fulfillment of this in the fact that the nations referred to by these first three beasts were still in being, and could be recognized as nations, in their boundaries, or customs, or languages; but that the power which they had wielded had passed into other hands.
Yet their lives were prolonged - Margin, as in Chaldee, "a prolonging in life was given them." That is, they were not utterly destroyed and consumed as the power of the fourth beast was after the solemn judgment. The meaning is, that in these kingdoms there would be energy for a time. They had life still; and the difference between them and the kingdom represented by the fourth beast was what would exist between wild animals subdued but still living, and a wild animal killed and burned. We should look for the fulfillment of this in some state of things where the kingdoms referred to by the three beasts were subdued and succeeded by others, though they still retained something of their national character; while the other kingdom had no successor of a civil kind, but where its power wholly ceased, and the dominion went wholly into other hands - so that it might be said that that kingdom, as such, had wholly ceased to be.
For a season and time - Compare the notes at Daniel 7:25. The time mentioned here is not definite. The phrase used (ועדן עד־זמן ‛ad-zeman ve‛ı̂ddân) refers to a definite period, both the words in the original referring to a designated or appointed time, though neither of them indicates anything about the length of the time, anymore than our word time does. Luther renders this, "For there was a time and an hour appointed to them how long each one should continue." Grotius explains this as meaning, "Beyond the time fixed by God they could not continue." The true meaning of the Chaldee is probably this: "For a time, even a definite time." The mind of the prophet is at first fixed upon the fact that they continue to live; then upon the fact, somehow apparent, that it is for a definite period. Perhaps in the vision he saw them one after another die or disappear. In the words used here, however, there is nothing by which we can determine how long they were to continue. The time that the power represented by the little horn is to continue explained in Daniel 7:25, but there is no clue by which we can ascertain how long the existence of the power represented by the first three beasts was to continue. All that is clear is, that it was to be lengthened out for some period, but that that was a definite and fixed period.
13
Daniel 7:13
日本語
「私は夜の幻のうちに見ていた」――幻たちは相互に連結しているのであるから、明らかに同じ夜の幻のうちに、あるいは同じ折に見たものである。(Daniel 7:1; Daniel 7:7) を見よ。彼が見続けていたこと、あるいは新しい幻が彼の前を過ぎ去ったという意味である。
「見よ、人の子のような方が」――ダニエルがこれを何らかの象徴によって表そうとしないことは注目に値する。象徴による表現は第四の獣で終わり、今や記述は文字どおりの形式――メシアと聖徒たちの王国の立てられるという形式――を取る。なぜこの形式の変化が生じるのかは述べられておらず、知られてもいないが、聖書の著者たちはメシアを象徴によって表すことを注意深く避けたように見える。「人の子」という句――אנשׁ בר bar 'ĕnâsh――は、新約聖書にはしばしば現れ、実際、救い主ご自身がご自分を指し示されるのに好んで用いられた名称であるが、ここにあるような連結と指示をもっては旧約聖書の他のどこにも出てこない。(Daniel 3:25) には、燃える炉に投げ込まれた三人の「若者たち」とともに現れた者に当てはめられる「神の子」という句がある(その箇所の注解を見よ)。エゼキエル書では「人の子」という句が、預言者である彼自身に当てはまるものとして彼の預言に八十回を超えて出てくるが、ここで用いられている表現は、意図されたこの人物に適用されるものとしては旧約聖書の他のどこにも出てこない。ここに出たこの表現は、預言の中でそれに結び付けられている出来事のゆえにのみでなく、新約聖書の言語を形作るのに大いに寄与してきたという点でも、説明しておくことが重要である。その意味に関しては三つの問いがある。それは何を意味するのか。誰を指すのか。そしてその正当な成就は何であるのか。
(1)この句は、人を表す単なるヘブル語ないしカルデア語の表現以上のものであり、常に何らかの特別な意味を帯び、それが適用される人物の何らかの独特な特性に関連して、あるいは何らかの特別な意図をもって用いられる。この意図を確かめるには、原文の表現に注意が払われなければならない。「אישׁ 'ı̂ysh と אישׁה 'ı̂iyshâh との二語が単に性の指定として用いられるのに対し、語源的に אישׁ 'ı̂ysh に近い אנושׁ 'ĕnôsh は、弱い、病む、というその本来の意味を常に念頭に置いて用いられる。これは人間に対する倫理的な名称である。しかし אדם 'âdâm は、肉体的・自然的状態における人間を表す。それゆえ、(Psalm 8:4; Job 25:6) のような箇所におけるこの語の使用も、בן bên との結合も満足に説明される。したがって、強調された呼びかけである אדם בן bên 'âdâm ――人の子――は、(エゼキエルにおいては)預言者に、自分がほかのすべての者と同じ人間であることを思い起こさせるよう続けられる勧告である」。――ハヴェルニック『エゼキエル注釈』2:1-2、『ビブリオテカ・サクラ』第5巻718ページで引用されたもの。ここで用いられた表現は בר־אנושׁ bar -'ĕnôsh であり、本来、弱く病みやすい者としての人間を正当に指す。誰かに「ひとりの人の子」として適用されるなら、それは彼が人類の弱さと虚弱に与る者であることを示すために用いられるはずのものである。そして新約聖書において救い主がご自分に適用して「人の子」という句を用いられるとき、この事実への疑いのない言及がある。すなわち、彼が我々の種族に対して独特な関係を保たれたこと、彼があらゆる点で人間であったこと、彼が我々の一人であったこと、彼がそれほどにも我々の本性をご自身の上に取られたので、この事実をひと目で示す名称が彼に与えられることに独特の適切さがあったということである。ダニエルがここで用いた句は、次のような者を示すであろう。
(a)人の姿形を具えた者。
(b)あたかも人間の本性が彼のうちに具現されているかのように、人間に対して独特な関係を保つ者。
(2)ここでの次の問いは、これは誰を指すのか、ということである。実際に、預言者が幻のうちにこのように見た者は誰か。あるいは、これによって表そうとされた者は誰か。この問いは、ダニエルがこれを誰と考え、誰と理解したかというよりも、実際に誰を表すことが意図されたか、あるいは誰のうちに成就が見出されるか、ということである。というのも、これが天からの幻であったと想定すれば、完全な成就の見出される何かを指し示すことを意図していたことは明らかだからである。さて、これが天の幻であり、将来の時に起こることを表すことを意図していたと認めるなら、メシアが指されていると想定すべき最も明確な理由がある。実際これはあまりにも明白なので、預言の性格と意図を決定する論駁できない事柄の一つとして仮定することができる。その理由は以下のとおりである。
(a)この名自体が、主イエスが取られた名として――地上におられたときにご自身を指し示すことを選ばれた、好んで用いられた名として――ある。彼はこの名を術語として用いた。メシアを指すものと理解される名として、またメシアへの言及としては説明を要しないかのように用いた。しかしこの用法は、ダニエル書のこの箇所からのみ由来しえた。旧約聖書の他のどこにも、この名がしかるべくメシアを指し、あるいは彼に適用されると理解されうる場所はないからである。
(b)この解釈は、あらゆる時代のユダヤ人著述家たち一般によって与えられてきた。これを、彼らの説明が権威あると述べるために引用するのではなく、これが自然で明白な意味であることを示すために、また後で見るように、この解釈が新約聖書の言語に形態と形式とを与え、そこで十分に是認されているために引用するのである。こうして、古代の書『ゾーハル』には次のようにある。「メシアの時代に、イスラエルは主にとって一つの民となり、主は彼らを地の上で一つの国民とされる。彼らは上にも下にも支配するであろう。『見よ、人の子のような方が天の雲とともに来た』と書かれているとおりに。この方こそメシアの王であり、彼については『これらの王たちの日に、天の神は決して滅ぼされない王国を立てられる』などと書かれている」。タルムードも同様であり、古代ユダヤ人のラビたちの大多数も同様である。ギルの該当箇所の注解を見よ。この解釈がユダヤ人のラビたちの間で一様でなかったことは事実であるが、それでもなお、キリスト教の解釈者たちの間でそうであったように、彼らの間で優勢であった。
(c)主イエスが、ご自身を指し示すことを選ばれた名称として「人の子」という称号を採られたことは、この解釈への是認を与えるように思われる。この称号は、ダニエルのこの箇所がご自身を指すことを絶えず想起させるようなものであり、とりわけ彼がそれを「人の子は天の雲とともに来るであろう」などの宣言と結び付けられたことによってそうである。このような連結においてこの称号を用いながら、ダニエルのこの箇所を想起させないこと、あるいは聞き手の心に、彼がこれをご自分に適用されるものとして理解されることを望んでおられるという印象を残さないことは、ほとんど不可能であった。
(d)さらに付け加えれば、これは他の誰にもしかるべく適用されえない。ポルフュリオスはユダ・マカバイオスが意図されていると考え、グロティウスはローマの民を指すとし、アベン・エズラはイスラエルの民を、コッケイウスはいと高き方の民を指すとした(ギル)。しかしこれらはすべて不自然な解釈であり、新約聖書の言語に自分の思いを影響させることを許すことによって人が得る結論にも反する。救い主ご自身によってこれほどしばしば用いられたこの称号、天の雲という付随する状況、聖徒たちの王国の立てられる直前に置かれているこの幻の位置、そしてその王国はメシアのもとでのみ立てられうるという事実は、すべて、この幻に表された人物が彼であることを指し示す。
(3)しかしもしこれがメシアを指すのであれば、次の問いは、何をこの幻の正当な成就と見なすべきか、ということである。それは正確には何に関係するのか。人の子なるメシアが天の雲のうちに文字どおり現れ、王国が公然かつ厳粛な仕方で聖徒たちの手に移されると想定すべきなのか。これらの問いへの答えとして、次のように述べることができる。
(a)これは最後のさばきに関係するものとして理解することはできない。そのような関連をもって導入されてはいないからである。ここでの「人の子」は、人間の事柄の終末に世界をさばくために来る者としてではなく、王国を立てるため、あるいはご自分の聖徒たちのために王国を獲得するという目的のために来る者として表されている。世界の人々が共に集められることもなく、義者と悪者とをさばく行為もなく、どちらに対する判決の宣告もない。世界が聖徒たちの支配のもとにはるかに長く続くことは明らかである。
(b)これは文字どおりに取るべきではない。すなわち、我々はこの箇所から、聖徒たちの王国の立てられる前に備えて、天の雲のうちに人の子が文字どおり現れることを期待すべきではない。というのも、一つの部分が文字どおりに取られるべきなら、すべてがそうであってはならない理由はないからである。その場合我々は、雲のうちに人の子が現れることのみならず、この幻の成就の一部として次の事々をも期待しなければならない。すなわち、玉座ないし座席が文字どおりに置かれること、その玉座から炎が文字どおり流れ出ること、白い衣をまとい羊毛のような髪を持つ「年を経た方」が文字どおり現れること、人の姿の者が王国を求めるために玉座に着いておられるその方に文字どおり近づくこと、などである。しかしこれらすべてが起こると信じうる者はなく、実際にそう信じている者もいない。
(c)正当な解釈は、これを、ダニエルが見たとおりの幻として――ここに記述されたことが起こるかのような世界の状態の表れとして――見なすことである。すなわち、これがしかるべき象徴的表現となるような大いなる出来事が起こるはずであった。あたかも人の子なるメシアがこのように現れ、「年を経た方」に近づき、王国を受け、それを聖徒たちに譲られるかのように。さて、ここで教えようとすることがら、そして我々の期待すべきことを理解するのに実際の困難はない。それらの事実は次のとおりである。
-
ここで「年を経た方」と呼ばれる方は、力と支配権の源である。
-
ここで獣と角とによって表された力に対して、何らかの厳しい裁きが下るであろう。
-
世界の王国ないし支配権は、実際に、ここで「人の子」と呼ばれる者――メシア――に与えられる。これは、あらゆる力の源である「年を経た方」に彼が近づくことによって、ここに表されている。
-
王国ないし権力が、何らかの仕方で聖徒たちの手に移される。あるいは、彼がそのかしらとなり、世界に対する支配権が実際に彼の民の手のうちにあり、メシアの律法があらゆるところで行き渡るような王国が地上に立てられる。その王国の本質的特性が何であるかは、(Daniel 7:27) と比較しつつ (Daniel 7:14) の解説によって知ることができる。
「天の雲とともに来られた」――すなわち、雲に囲まれて天から降って来るかのように見えた、ということである。それゆえ救い主は、おそらくこの言葉を指して、世界をさばくために来られるとき、雲のうちに、あるいは雲に囲まれて来られる者としてご自身を語られる (Matthew 24:30; Matthew 26:64; Mark 13:26; Mark 14:62)。(Revelation 1:7) を比較せよ。雲は神性のしかるべき象徴である。(Psalm 97:2; Psalm 104:3) を見よ。異邦人たちも同じ象徴を用い、彼らの神々を雲に覆われて現れる者として描いた。
「Tandem venias, precamur Nube candentes humeros amictus Augur Apollo!」 ――「ついに来たまえ、われらは祈る、/輝く肩に雲をまとわれて、/鳥占のアポロンよ!」――ホラティウス『歌集』I.2。
我々の面前にあるこの箇所での言及は、最後のさばきへではなく、地上の一つの王国がメシアの手に移されるであろうという事実へのものである。彼は荘厳に世界に来られ、獣たちによって表された王国に代わって続く王国を受け取る者として表されている。
「年を経た方のところに来られ」――(Daniel 7:9)。これはこの箇所が最後のさばきを指しえないことを示している。彼は人類に判決を宣告するためではなく、王国のための嘆願をするかのように、力の源である神、すなわち「年を経た方」のところに来られる。ここでのこの行為は、神があらゆる力の源であること、支配するすべての者が彼から権威を受けること、そしてメシアでさえも、世界にご自分の王国を立てられるとき、それを父のみ手から受け取られることを適切に示している。これは新約聖書のあらゆる表現と一致する。我々はこれらが文字どおりに起こると想定してはならない。「年を経た方」によって示されたような、年老いた外観を帯びた方の玉座への文字どおりの着座もなく、人の姿をした者が王国を受けるためにその方に文字どおり近づくこともないのである。このような箇所は、聖書の言語を文字どおり解釈しようとする試みの不合理を示す。この象徴が正当に意味しうるすべては、メシアのもとで地上に立てられるべき王国が、神から受け取られたものであるということである。
「彼らは彼をその方の前に近づけた」――すなわち、彼がその方の前に近づけられた、ということである。あるいは、彼の従者たちが彼を近づけたという意味にも取れる。この言語が必然的に含意するのは、彼がその方の座に近づき、その方から王国を受けたということだけである。
Original em inglês
I saw in the night visions - Evidently in the same night visions, or on the same occasion, for the visions are connected. See Daniel 7:1, Daniel 7:7. The meaning is, that he continued beholding, or that a new vision passed before him.
And, behold, one like the Son of man ... - It is remarkable that Daniel does not attempt to represent this by any symbol. The representation by symbols ceases with the fourth beast; and now the description assumes a literal form - the setting up of the kingdom of the Messiah and of the saints. Why this change of form occurs is not stated or known, but the sacred writers seem carefully to have avoided any representation of the Messiah by symbols. The phrase "The Son of Man" - אנשׁ בר bar 'ĕnâsh - does not occur elsewhere in the Old Testament in such a connection, and with such a reference as it has here, though it is often found in the New, and is, in fact, the favorite term by which the Saviour designates himself. In Daniel 3:25, we have the phrase "the Son of God" (see the note at that passage), as applicable to one who appeared with the three" children" that were cast into the burning furnace; and in Ezekiel, the phrase "son of man" often occurs as applicable to himself as a prophet, being found more than eighty times in his prophecies, but the expression here used does not elsewhere occur in the Old Testament as applicable to the personage intended. As occurring here, it is important to explain it, not only in view of the events connected with it in the prophecy, but as having done much to mould the language of the New Testament. There are three questions in regard to its meaning: What does it signify? To whom does it refer? And what would be its proper fulfillment?
(1) The phrase is more than a mere Hebrew or Chaldee expression to denote man, but is always used with some peculiar significancy, and with relation to some peculiar characteristic of the person to whom it is applied, or with some special design. To ascertain this design, regard should be had to the expression of the original. "While the words אישׁ 'ı̂ysh and אישׁה 'ı̂iyshâh are used simply as designations of sex, אנושׁ 'ĕnôsh, which is etymologically akin to אישׁ 'ı̂ysh, is employed with constant reference to its original meaning, to be weak, sick; it is the ethical designation of man, but אדם 'âdâm denotes man as to his, physical, natural condition - whence the use of the word in such passages as Psalm 8:4; Job 25:6, and also its connection with בן bên are satisfactorily explained, The emphatic address אדם בן bên 'âdâm - Son of man - is therefore (in Ezekiel) a continued admonition to the prophet to remember that he is a man like all the rest." - Havernick, Com. on, Ezekiel 2:1-2, quoted in the Bibliotheca Sacra, v. 718. The expression used here is בר־אנושׁ bar -'ĕnôsh, and would properly refer to man as weak and feeble, and as liable to be sick, etc. Applied to anyone as "a Son of man," it would be used to denote that he partook of the weakness and infirmities of the race; and, as the phrase "the Son of man" is used in the New Testament when applied by the Saviour to himself, there is an undoubted reference to this fact - that he sustained a peculiar relation to our race; that he was in all respects a man; that he was one of us; that he had so taken our nature on himself that there was a peculiar propriety that a term which would at once designate this should be given to him. The phrase used here by Daniel would denote some one
(a) in the human form;
(b) some one sustaining a peculiar relation to man - as if human nature were embodied in him.
(2) The next inquiry here is, to whom, this refers? Who, in fact, was the one that was thus seen in vision by the prophet? Or who was designed to be set forth by this? This inquiry is not so much, whom did Daniel suppose or understand this to be? as, who was in fact designed to be represented; or in whom would the fulfillment be found? For, on the supposition that this was a heavenly vision, it is clear that it was intended to designate some one in whom the complete fulfillment was to be found. Now, admitting that this was a heavenly vision, and that it was intended to represent what would occur in future times, there are the clearest reasons for supposing that the Messiah was referred to; and indeed this is so plain, that it may be assumed as one of the indisputable things by which to determine the character and design of the prophecy. Among these reasons are the following:
(a) The name itself, as a name assumed by the Lord Jesus - the favorite name by which he chose to designate himself when on the earth. This name he used technically; he used it as one that would be understood to denote the Messiah; he used it as if it needed no explanation as having a reference to the Messiah. But this usage could have been derived only from this passage in Daniel, for there is no other place in the Old Testament where the name could refer with propriety to the Messiah, or would be understood to be applicable to him.
(b) This interpretation has been given to it by the Jewish writers in general, in all ages. I refer to this, not to say that their explanation is authoritative, but to show that it is the natural and obvious meaning; and because, as we shall see, it is what has given shape and form to the language of the New Testament, and is fully sanctioned there. Thus, in the ancient book of Zohar it is said, "In the times of the Messiah, Israel shall be one people to the Lord, and he shall make them one nation in the earth, and they shall rule above and below; as it is written, "Behold, one like the Son of man came with the clouds of heaven;" this is the King Messiah, of whom it is written, And in the days of these kings shall the God of heaven set up a kingdom which shall never be destroyed, etc." So in the Talmud, and so the majority of the ancient Jewish rabbis. See Gill, Com. in loc. It is true that this interpretation has not been uniform among the Jewish rabbis, but still it has prevailed among them, as it has among Christian interpreters.
(c) A sanction seems to be given to this interpretation by the adoption of the title "Son of man" by the Lord Jesus, as that by which he chose to designate himself. That title was such as would constantly suggest this place in Daniel as referring to himself, and especially as he connected with it the declaration that "the Son of man would come in the clouds of heaven, etc." It was hardly possible that he should use the title in such a connection without suggesting this place in Daniel, or without leaving the impression on the minds of his hearers that he meant to be understood as applying this to himself.
(d) It may be added, that it cannot with propriety be applied to any other. Porphyry, indeed, supposed that Judas Maccabeus was intended; Grotius that it referred to the Roman people; Aben Ezra to the people of Israel; and Cocceius to the people of the Most High (Gill); but all these are unnatural interpretations, and are contrary to what one would obtain by allowing the language of the New Testament to influence his mind. The title - so often used by the Saviour himself; the attending circumstances of the clouds of heaven; the place which the vision occupies - so immediately preceding the setting up of the kingdom of the saints; and the fact that that kingdom can be set up only under the Messiah, all point to him as the personage represented in the vision.
(3) But if it refers to the Messiah, the next inquiry is, What is to be regarded as the proper fulfillment of the vision? To what precisely does it relate? Are we to suppose that there will be a literal appearing of the Son of man - the Messiah - in the clouds of heaven, and a passing over of the kingdom in a public and solemn manner into the hands of the saints? In reply to these questions, it may be remarked
(a) that this cannot be understood as relating to the last judgment, for it is not introduced with reference to at all. The "Son of man" is not here represented as coming with a view to judge the world at the winding-up of human affairs, but for the purpose of setting up a kingdom, or procuring a kingdom for his saints. There is no assembling of the people of the world together; no act of judging the righteous and the wicked; no pronouncing of a sentence on either. It is evident that the world is to continue much longer under the dominion of the saints.
(b) It is not to be taken literally; that is, we are not, from this passage, to expect a literal appearance of the of man in the clouds of heaven, preparatory to the setting up of the kingdom of the saints. For if one portion is to be taken literally, there is no reason why all should not be. Then we are to expect, not merely the appearing of the Son of man in the clouds, but also the following things, as a part of the fulfillment of the vision, to wit: the literal placing of a throne, or seat; the literal streaming forth of flame from his throne; the literal appearing of the "Ancient of days," with a garment of white, and hair as wool; a literal approach of the Son of man to him as seated on his throne to ask of him a kingdom, etc. But no one can believe that all this is to occur; no one does believe that it will.
(c) The proper interpretation is to regard this, as it was seen by Daniel, as a vision - a representation of a state of things in the world as if what is here described would occur. That is, great events were to take place, of which this would be a proper symbolic representation - or as if the Son of man, the Messiah, would thus appear; would approach the "Ancient of days;" would receive a kingdom, and would make it over to the saints. Now, there is no real difficulty in understanding what is here meant to be taught, and what we are to expect; and these points of fact are the following, namely,:
-
That he who is here called the "Ancient of days" is the source of power and dominion.
-
That there would be some severe adjudication of the power here represented by the beast and the horn.
-
That the kingdom or dominion of the world is to be in fact given to him who is here called "the Son of man" - the Messiah - a fact represented here by his approaching the "Ancient of days," who is the source of all power.
-
That there is to be some passing over of the kingdom or power into the hands of the saints; or some setting up of a kingdom on the earth, of which he is to be the head, and in which the dominion over the world shall be in fact in the hands of his people, and the laws of the Messiah everywhere prevail. What will be the essential characteristics of that kingdom we may learn by the exposition of Daniel 7:14, compared with Daniel 7:27.
Came with the clouds of heaven - That is, he seemed to come down from the sky encompassed with clouds. So the Saviour, probably intending to refer to this language, speaks of himself, when he shall come to judge the world, as coming in clouds, or encompassed by clouds, Matthew 24:30; Matthew 26:64; Mark 13:26; Mark 14:62. Compare Revelation 1:7. Clouds are an appropriate symbol of the Divinity. See Psalm 97:2; Psalm 104:3. The same symbol was employed by the pagan, representing their deities as appearing covered with a cloud:
"Tandem venias, precamur,
Nube candentes humeros amictus,
Augur Apollo!"
- Horace, Lyr. I.2.
The allusion in the place before us is not to the last judgment, but to the fact that a kingdom on tho earth would be passed over into the hands of the Messiah. He is represented as coming sublimely to the world, and as receiving a kingdom that would succeed those represented by the beasts.
And came to the Ancient of days - Daniel 7:9. This shows that the passage cannot refer to the final judgment. He comes to the "Ancient of days" - to God as the source of power - as if to ask a petition for a kingdom; not to pronounce a judgment on mankind. The act here appropriately denotes that God is the source of all power; that all who reign derive their authority from him, and that even the Messiah, in setting up his kingdom in the world, receives it at the hand of the Father. This is in accordance with all the representations in the New Testament. We are not to suppose that this will occur literally. There is to be no such literal sitting of one with the appearance of age - denoted by the "Ancient of days" - on a throne; nor is there to be any such literal approaching him by one in the form of a man to receive a kingdom. Such passages show the absurdity of the attcmpts to interpret the language of the Scriptures literally. All that this symbol fairly means must be, that the kingdom that was to be set up under the Messiah on the earth was received from God.
And they brought him near before him - That is, he was brought near before him. Or, it may mean that his attendants brought him near. All that the language necessarily implies is, that he came near to his seat, and received from him a kingdom.
14
Daniel 7:14
日本語
「彼に支配が与えられた」――すなわち、「日の老いたる者」として表されている方によって。この素直な解釈は、彼がその方から支配を受けたということである。これは新約聖書において一貫した表現である。(Matthew 28:18)、(John 3:35)、(1 Corinthians 15:27) を比較されたい。ここでの「支配」という語は、統治あるいは権威――君侯が行使するようなもの――を意味する。彼は、君あるいは支配者として王国の上に立てられたのである。
「栄光」――そのような帝国のかしらにある者にふさわしい栄光あるいは名誉のことである。
「王国」――すなわち、彼が治めるであろうということ。彼が主権を持つであろうということ。この王国の性質と範囲は、直ちに、普遍的かつ永続的なものとして指定される。この言葉に文字どおりの可視的なものが正しく含まれるかどうかという問題については、この節の終わりで適切に検討される。ここで注意を要するのはただ、旧約聖書のどこでも、メシアが王となり、王国を持つことが約束されているということである。(Psalm 2:1-12)、(Isaiah 9:6-7) を比較されたい。
「すべての民、諸国、諸国語が彼に仕える」――それは普遍的であり、すべての国々を包摂するものであろう。ここでの言葉づかいは、普遍性を強調して示すようなものである。(Daniel 3:4)、(Daniel 4:1) の注を参照。これは、その王国が地のすべての国々に及ぶことを含意し、私たちはこの成就を、メシアのそのような普遍的な支配の中にのみ求めるべきである。
「その支配は永遠の支配」――四つの獣によって表されている他のものはみな過ぎ去るが、これは永続的で永遠のものとなるであろう。何ものもそれを破壊しない。それは、地の大部分の王国がそうであったような、その破壊の原因となる内的な弱さや不和の種を何も持たず、また、それを侵略し打ち倒すような外的な力も存在しないであろう。この宣言は、王国がどのような形で存在するかについては何も断定せず、単にそれが存在するという事実を主張するのみである。これが疑いなく言及しているメシアの王国に関しては、同じことが新約聖書で繰り返し一貫して断定されている。(Matthew 16:18)、(Hebrews 12:28)、(Revelation 11:15) を比較されたい。これがどのような形と様式において起こるかは、新約聖書においてより完全に展開されており、ダニエルに見られた幻の中では事実のみが述べられている。
ここで問題が生じる。聖徒たちに与えられるこの王国に関するこの予言の成就とは何であろうか。幻の中で用いられた言葉からして、地の上に起こると私たちが正当に期待しうるものは何であろうか。これらの問いに関しては、取られうる見解は二つしかなく、この箇所の解釈はその一方か他方を支持しなければならない。
(a)一つは、これが文字どおりに成就するという意味での解釈である。すなわち、神の子メシアが地の上で人格的に支配するであろうというのである。これによれば、彼は可視的で栄光ある王国を打ち立てるために来たり、エルサレムを都とし、世界の上に笏を振るう。すべての国々と民は彼に従い、すべての権威は彼の民によって彼の下に行使される。
(b)もう一つの見解によれば、神の子の地の上での霊的支配がある。すなわち、彼の宗教の諸原則があらゆるところで優勢となり、義人が統治し、贖い主の律法がどこでも従われるようになる。彼の福音が、支配者と民とを問わずすべての人の心の上にそのように広く行き渡り、福音がすべての法を改良し、すべての習慣を統御し、すべての弊害とあらゆる形の悪を取り除き、人々が一般にその福音の影響の下に置かれるため、彼が地の上で支配しており、実際に運営されている政府は彼のものであると言いうることになる。
これらの異なる見解と、この箇所の真の解釈に関して、次のように論評することができる。
(1)私たちはこの文字どおりの成就を求めるべきではない。ここに記述されていることが文字どおり起こることを期待すべきではない。全体が明らかに象徴的な表現であり、その成就は、その象徴が正当に示すところの何かの中に見出されるべきである。老人の姿をした者――「日の老いたる者」――による実際の玉座への着座があるとか、「人の子のような者」が王国を受け取るために彼のもとに文字どおりに来ることがあるとかを主張しうる者は誰もいない。しかし、表現の一部が文字どおりに解釈されないのであれば、なぜ他の部分がそうでなければならないのか。付け加えれば、これが文字どおり起こるとどこにも述べられていない。
(2)ここに公正に含意されていることはすべて、後者の解釈の中に見出される。福音の諸原則のそのような普及はこの言葉の力にかない、幻のすべての部分はその中に実際の成就を見出すであろう。
(a)それが神から出るという事実――「日の老いたる者」として表されている。
(b)それが彼によって与えられるという事実、すなわち王国が彼によってメシアに譲渡されるという事実。
(c)メシアがそのような王国を持つという事実。すなわち、彼が地の上で、人の心と生涯の中において支配するという事実。
(d)その王国が普遍的であるという事実――すべての民に及ぶという事実。
(e)そして、それが永続的であるという事実。すなわち、それが時の終わり、ここでの万物の成就まで及び、その後、天において永遠のものであるという事実。
この箇所のきわめて十分で豊かな説明については――ここの付加的な説明を必要としないほどに十分で豊かなものだが―― (Daniel 2:44-45) の注を参照されたい。
Original em inglês
And there was given him dominion - That is, by him who is represented as the "Ancient of days." The fair interpretation of this is, that he received the dominion from him. This is the uniform representation in the New Testament. Compare Matthew 28:18; John 3:35; 1 Corinthians 15:27. The word dominion here means rule or auhority - such as a prince exercises. He was set over a kingdom as a prince or ruler.
And glory - That is the glory or honor appropriate to one at the head of such an empire.
And a kingdom - That is, he would reign. He would have sovereignty. The nature and the extent of this kingdom is immediately designated as one that would be universal and perpetual. What is properly implied in this language as to the question whether it will be literal and visible, will be appropriately considered at the close of the verse. All that is necessary to be noticed here is, that it is everywhere promised in the Old Testament that the Messiah would be a king, and have a kingdom. Compare Psalm 2:1-12; Isaiah 9:6-7.
That all people, nations, and languages should serve him - It would be universal; would embrace all nations. The language here is such as would emphatically denote universality. See the notes at Daniel 3:4; Daniel 4:1. It implies that that kingdom would extend over all the nations of the earth, and we are to look for the fulfillment of this only in such a universal reign of the Messiah.
His dominion is an everlasting dominion ... - The others, represented by the four beasts, would all pass away, but this would be permanent and eternal. Nothing would destroy it. It would not have, as most kingdoms of the earth have had, any such internal weakness or source of discord as would be the cause of its destruction, nor would there be any external power that would invade or overthrow it. This declaration affirms nothing as to the form in which the kingdom would exist, but merely asserts the fact that it would do so. Respecting the kingdom of the Messiah, to which this undoubtedly alludes, the same thing is repeatedly and uniformly affirmed in the New Testament. Compare Matthew 16:18; Hebrews 12:28; Revelation 11:15. The form and manner in which this will occur is more fully developed in the New Testament; in the vision seen by Daniel the fact only is stated.
The question now arises, What would be a fulfillment of this prediction respecting the kingdom that will be given to the saints? What, from the language used in the vision, should we be legitimately authorized to expect to take place on the earth? In regard to these questions, there are but two views which can be taken, and the interpretation of the passage must sustain the one or the other.
(a) One is what supposes that this will be literally fulfilled in the sense that the Son of God, the Messiah, will reign personally on earth. According to this, he will come to set up a visible and glorious kingdom, making Jerusalem his capital, and swaying his scepter over the world. All nations and people will be subject to him; all authority will be wielded by his people under him.
(b) According to the other view, there will be a spiritual reign of the Son of God over the earth; that is, the principles of his religion will everywhere prevail, and the righteous will rule, and the laws of the Redeemer will be obeyed everywhere. There will be such a prevalence of his gospel on the hearts of all - rulers and people; the gospel will so modify all laws, and control all customs, and remove all abuses, and all the forms of evil; men will be so generally under the influence of that gospel, that it may be said that He reigns on the earth, or that the government actually administered is his.
In regard to these different views, and to the true interpretation of the passage, it may be remarked,
(1) That we are not to look for the literal fulfillment of this; we are not to expect that what is here described will literally occur. The whole is evidently a symbolic representation, and the fulfillment is to be found in something that the symbol would properly denote. No one can pretend that there is to be an actual sitting on the throne, by one in the form of an old man - "the Ancient of days" - or that there is to be a literal coming to him by one "like the Son of man," to receive a kingdom. But if one part of the representation is not to be literally interpreted, why should the other be? It may be added, that it is nowhere said that this would literally occur.
(2) All that is fairly implied here is found in the latter interpretation. Such a prevalence of the principles of the gospel would meet the force of the language, and every part of the vision would find a real fulfillment in that.
(a) The fact that it proceeds from God - represented as "the Ancient of days."
(b) The fact that it is given by him, or that the kingdom is made over by him to the Messiah.
(c) The fact that the Messiah would have such a kingdom; that is, that he would reign on the earth, in the hearts and lives of men.
(d) The fact that that kingdom would be universal - extending over all people.
(e) And the fact that it would be perpetual; that is, that it would extend down to the end of time, or the consummation of all things here, and that it would be then eternal in the heavens.
For a very full and ample illustration of this passage - so full and ample as to supersede the necessity of any additional illustration here, see the notes at Daniel 2:44-45.
15
Daniel 7:15
日本語
「私ダニエルは、霪の中で愈えられた」――すなわち、私は悩んだ、あるいは私の心は重く悲しくされた、ということである。これはおそらく部分的には、彼が幻の意味を十分に理解していなかったことによるものであり、部分的には、それによって示された事本の恐るべき重大な性質によるものであった。使徒ヨハネも同様に Rev 5:4 で、「その巻物を開いて読むにふさわしい者がだれも見つからなかったので、私は激しく泣いた」と述べている。
「私のからだのうちで」――欔外では、カルデア語のままに「鞠」となっている。疑いなくからだが言及されており、それは心の外皮として、すなわち剣が鞠の中にあるようにたましいがその中に収められ、死によってそこから引き出されるものとして、そう呼ばれている。同じ隠喻がプリニウスによっても用いられている。Donec cremato co inimici remeanti animae velut vaginam ademerint。同様に、醒い顔のゆえにアレクサンダー大王から軽んじられたある哲学者は、「人間のからだは、たましいがその中に隠される剣の鞠にほかならない」(Corpus hominis nil est nisi vagina gladii in qua anima reconditur)と答えたと言われている。――ゲーニウス。レンゲルケの同箇所の注解と比較せよ。Job 27:8 も参照。「神がそのたましいを取られるとき」、あるいはむしろ、剣が鞠から引き抜かれるように、そのたましいを引き抜かれるとき。同箇所の注と比較せよ。ブクストルフの『タルグーム語辞典』(Lexicon Tal.)1307ページも参照。ここでの意味は明らかである々ダニエルが心に悲しみと悩みを覚え、それが彼のからだに知覚しえる影響を及ぼした、ということである。
「私の頭の幻が私を悩ませた」――頭はここでは知性の座とみなされており、彼はこれらの幻をあたかも頭によって見られたものであるかのように語っている。すなわち、それらは彼の目の前を過ぎ去るかのようであった、ということである。
Original em inglês
I Daniel was grieved in my spirit - That is, I was troubled; or my heart was made heavy and sad. This was probably in part because he did not fully understand the meaning of the vision, and partly on account of the fearful and momentous nature of what was indicated by it. So the apostle John Rev 5:4 says, "And I wept much because no man was found worthy to open and to read the book."
In the midst of my body - Margin, as in the Chaldee, sheath. The body is undoubtedly referred to, and is so called as the envelope of the mind - or as that in which the soul is inserted, as the sword is in the sheath, and from which it is drawn out by death. The same metaphor is employed by Pliny: Donec cremato co inimici remeanti animae velut vaginam ademerint. So, too, a certain philosopher, who was slighted by Alexander the Great on account of his ugly face, is said to have replied, Corpus hominis nil est nisi vagina gladii in qua anima reconditur. - Gesenius. Compare Lengerke, in loc. See also Job 27:8, "When God taketh away his soul;" or rather draws out his soul, as a sword is drawn out of the sheath. Compare the note at that place. See also Buxtorf's Lexicon Tal. p. 1307. The meaning here is plain - that Daniel felt sad and troubled in mind, and that this produced a sensible effect on his body.
And the visions of my head troubled me - The head is here regarded as the seat of the intellect, and he speaks of these visions as if they were seen by the head. That is, they seemed to pass before his eyes.
16
Daniel 7:16
日本語
私はその近くに立っている者たちの一人に近づいた — すなわち、御座の近くに立っているものとして現れた天使たちの一人に近づいたのである。ダニエル7:10。ダニエル8:13、ゼカリヤ4:4-5、黙示録7:13と比較せよ。御座を取り囲んでいるのを見た天使たちが、この主題についての知識を自分に与えることができるだろうとダニエルが考えたのは自然なことであった。ダニエルが受けた答えは、彼の期待が誤っていなかったことを示している。神はしばしば、重要な真理を人々に伝えるために天使たちを用い、あるいはご自身の御旨を伝える媒体として彼らを置かれた。黙示録1:1、使徒の働き7:53、ヘブル2:2と比較せよ。
彼は私に知らせ、その事々の解き明かしを悟らせてくれた — 彼は象徴の意味を説明し、ダニエルがそれらを理解するようにした。ダニエルが、幻について天使の伝えた事柄のすべてを記録したわけではないように思われる。しかし、私たちがその概略的な意義を理解しうるだけのものは保存しているのである。
Original em inglês
I came near unto one of them that stood by - That is, to one of the angels who appeared to stand near the throne. Daniel 7:10. Compare Daniel 8:13; Zechariah 4:4-5; Revelation 7:13. It was natural for Daniel to suppose that the angels who were seen encircling the throne would be able to give him information on the subject, and the answers which Daniel received show that he was not mistaken in his expectation. God has often employed angels to communicate important truths to men, or has made them the medium of communicating his will. Compare Revelation 1:1; Acts 7:53; Hebrews 2:2.
So he told me, and made me know the interpretation of the things - He explained the meaning of the symbols, so that Daniel understood them. It would seem probable that Daniel has not recorded all that the angel communicated respecting the vision, but he has preserved so much that we may understand its general signification.
17
Daniel 7:17
日本語
これらの大いなる獣、すなわち四つのものは、四人の王である — 四人の王、あるいは四つの王朝である。これらが個々の王たちを指すと考えるべき理由はなく、明らかな意味は、地上に次々と興隆する四つの統治権あるいは帝国を指すということである。表現全体がそのように私たちに考えさせるのであり、この箇所は常にそのように解釈されてきた。ラテン語ヴルガートは regna、セプトゥアギンタは βασιλεῖαι(バシレイアイ)、ルターは Reiche、レンゲルケは Königreiche と訳している。この解釈は、「第四の獣は地の第四の国であろう」と明言するダニエル7:23によっても確証される。ダニエル7:24も見よ。
地から起こるものである — ダニエル7:2では、獣たちが動揺する諸国民の象徴である海から上がって来るものとして表されている。ここでは同じ観念がより文字通りに提示されており、このように激しい動乱に陥った地から彼らが湧き出るかのように現れるということである。これらの王朝は地の上にあるものであり、あらゆる点でその地上的な起源を示すことになるはずであった。おそらくこれらの言葉はまた、この四つの王朝と、それに続く天に起源を持つものとの明確な対比を表すために意図されたものであろう。これが幻の意味について与えられた一般的な説明であり、彼は初めの三つに関しては直ちにその説明に満足したが、第四のものはより神秘的で重要な出来事を指し示すように思われたため、これについてはより詳細な説明を求める気になったのである。
Original em inglês
These great beasts, which are four, are four kings - Four kings or four dynasties. There is no reason for supposing that they refer to individual kings, but the obvious meaning is, that they refer to four dominions or empires that would succeed one another on the earth. So the whole representation leads us to suppose, and so the passage has been always interpreted. The Latin Vulgate renders it regna; the Septuagint βασιλεῖαι basileiai; Luther, Reiche; Lengerke, Konigreiche. This interpretation is confirmed, also, by Daniel 7:23, where it is expressly said that "the fourth beast shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth." See also Daniel 7:24.
Which shall arise out of the earth - In Daniel 7:2 the beasts are represented as coming up from the sea - the emblem of agitated nations. Here the same idea is presented more literally - that they would seem to spring up out of the earth, thus thrown into wild commotion. These dynasties were to be upon the earth, and they were in all things to indicate their earthly origin. Perhaps, also, it is designed by these words to denote a marked contrast between these four dynasties and the one that would follow - which would be of heavenly origin. This was the general intimation which was given to the meaning of the vision, and he was satisfied at once as to the explanation, so far as the first three were concerned; but the fourth seemed to indicate more mysterious and important events, and respecting this he was induced to ask a more particular explanation.
18
Daniel 7:18
日本語
「しかし、いと高き方の聖徒たちは国を受け継ぐ」——すなわち、彼らはついに全世界を支配する統治権を手中に収め、その時から終わりまでこれを治めるであろう、ということである。これがこの幻が明らかにしようとする大いなる事柄であり、これに心を向けさせることがその意図であったことは明白である。前に述べたことはすべてこれに対する準備であり、これに従属するものであり、すべての事がらはこれへと向かっていたのである。「いと高き方」と訳されている語——余白では「高い者たち、すなわち物や場所」——עליונין ‛eleyônı̂yn は複数形であり、文字どおりには「高い者たち」を意味する。しかし、ここでこの語が神を指していることは疑い得ない。この語が神に適用されているのは、אלהים 'ĕlohı̂ym の場合と同様に (Genesis 1:1、ほかしばしば)、威厳あるいは栄誉を表す卓越性の複数 (pluralis excellentiae) としてである。「聖徒たち」と訳されている語は「聖なる者たち」を意味し、その言及は疑いなく地上の神の民に対するものである。ここで意味されているのは、彼らが王国を所有する、すなわち支配するであろうということである。まことの宗教が至る所に行き渡り、従来おおむねそうであったように悪人の手にではなく、神を恐れその戒めを守る人々――善人――の手にすべての公職が委ねられるようになるとき、この預言は、そこに当然含まれているすべての点において成就するであろう。
「その国を永遠に、世々限りなく所有する」——これは、この支配が永続するであろうことを断言する力強く明確な宣言である。それは他の王国のように過ぎ去って、別の王国に取って代わられることはない。上述のとおり、もしそのような統治が地上で万物の終末まで続き、その後天における聖なる永遠の統治に引き継がれるなら、ここに断言されていることは真実となる。これを、この地上に文字どおり永遠の王国が存在するであろうという意味に解釈する必要はない。現在の事物の秩序が終わりを迎えるであろうことは、聖書の至る所で教えられているからである。しかし、今後この地上に義が広く行き渡る状態が存在すること、そしてそれがもたらされるときには終わりの時まで続くであろうことを教えるものとして、これを理解することが必要であるように思われる。
Original em inglês
But the saints of the Most High shall take the kingdom - That is, they shall ultimately take possession of the rule over all the world, and shall control it from that time onward to the end. This is the grand thing which the vision is designed to disclose, and on this it was evidently the intention to fix the mind. Everything before was preparatory and subordinate to this, and to this all things tended. The phrase rendered the Most High - in the margin "high ones, i. e., things or places" - עליונין ‛eleyônı̂yn - is in the plural number, and means literally high ones; but there can be no doubt that it refers here to God, and is given to Him as the word אלהים 'ĕlohı̂ym is (Genesis 1:1, et saepe), to denote majesty or honor - pluralis excellentice. The word rendered saints means the holy, and the reference is undoubtedly to the people of God on the earth, meaning here that they would take possession of the kingdom, or that they would rule. When true religion shall everywhere prevail, and when all offices shall be in the hands of good men - of men that fear God and that keep his commandments - instead of being in the hands of bad men, as they generally have been, then this prediction will be accomplished in respect to all that is fairly implied in it.
And possess the kingdom for ever, even forever and ever - This is a strong and emphatic declaration, affirming that this dominion will be perpetual. It will not pass away, like the other kingdoms, to be succeeded by another one. What is here affirmed, as above remarked, will be true if such a reign should continue on earth to the winding up of all things, and should then be succeeded by an eternal reign of holiness in the heavens. It is not necessary to interpret this as meaning that there would be literally an eternal kingdom on this earth, for it is everywhere taught in the Scriptures that the present order of things will come to a close. But it does seem necessary to understand this as teaching that there will be a state of prevalent righteousness on the earth hereafter, and that when that is introduced it will continue to the end of time.
19
Daniel 7:19
日本語
「そのとき私は、第四の獣についての真相を知りたいと思った」——私は、それが何を象徴するのかを特に知りたいと望んだのである。最初の三つの獣が表す王国には、非常に注目すべきものは何もないように思われたため、彼はそれらに関する最も一般的な知らせで満足していたように見える。しかし、第四の獣についてはそうではなかった。獣そのものがこれほど特異で、これほど凶暴でおそろしいこと、角の数がこれほど多かったこと、小さな角が生え出たことがこれほど驚くべきであったこと、その角の性格がこれほど異例であったこと、それに下されたさばきがこれほど厳粛であったこと、そして人の子のような方が王国を所有するために来られる幻――これらすべての事がらは、これほど恐ろしく、これほど尋常でない性格を持っていたので、ダニエルの心はそれらを見て特別に動揺し、彼はさらに詳しい説明を切に求めたのである。ダニエルがここで獣と角について与える描写は、主として彼が前に描写したのと同じ事情に言及するものである。しかし彼は、前に省略したいくつかの点を付け加えている。それらはみな、幻のおそろしい性格と重大な意味を心にいっそう深く刻みつける傾向のあるものである。たとえば、それが青銅の爪を持っていた事実、また聖徒たちと戦争をした事実がそれである。
「これはすべてのものと異なっていた」——その形と性格において異なっていた。特別な注意を引き、それによって非常に独特で注目すべき何かが示されているという印象を残すほどに異なっていたのである。Daniel 7:7の注解を見よ。
「きわめて恐ろしい」——Daniel 7:7の注解を見よ。
「その爪は青銅であった」——この事情は最初の記述 (Daniel 7:7) には述べられていない。これは、その歯が鉄であったという描写の他の部分とよく調和するものであり、獣によって象徴される王国の恐ろしくぞっとさせる性格を表すことを意図したものである。
「…食い尽くした」——Daniel 7:7の注解を見よ。
Original em inglês
Then I would know the truth of the fourth beast - I desired to know particularly what was symbolized by that. He appears to have been satisfied with the most general intimations in regard to the first three beasts, for the kingdoms represented by them seemed to have nothing very remarkable. But it was different in regard to the fourth. The beast itself was so remarkable - so fierce and terrific; the number of the horns was so great; the springing up of the little horn was so surprising; the character of that horn was so unusual; the judgment passed on it was so solemn; and the vision of one like the Son of man coming to take possession of the kingdom - all these things were of so fearful and so uncommon a character, that the mind of Daniel was peculiarly affected in view of them, and he sought earnestly for a further explanation. In the description that Daniel here gives of the beast and the horns, he refers in the main to the same cirumstances which he had before described; but he adds a few which he had before omitted, all tending to impress the mind more deeply with the fearful character and the momentous import of the vision; as, for instance, the fact that it had nails of brass, and made war with the saints.
Which was diverse from all the others - Different in its form and character; - so different as to attract particular attention, and to leave the impression that something very peculiar and remarkable was denoted by it. Notes, Daniel 7:7.
Exceeding dreadful - Notes, Daniel 7:7.
And his nails of brass - This circumstance is not mentioned in the first statement, Daniel 7:7. It accords well with the other part of the description, that his teeth were of iron, and is designed to denote the fearful and terrific character of tho kingdom, symbolized by the beast.
Which devoured ... - See the notes at Daniel 7:7.
20
Daniel 7:20
日本語
「また、その十の角について……」——Daniel 7:7-8の注解を見よ。
「その見かけが他のものたちより大きかった」——文字どおりには「その顔つきがその仲間たちのものより大きかった」。これは、その見かけあるいは顔つきが他のものたちよりも激しかった、あるいは厳しかったという意味ではなく、角の外観がより大きかった――רב rab――ということである。Daniel 7:8では、これは「小さな角」として描写されている。これを理解し、両者を調和させるためには、見る者がこの角の、ついにその群れの中で最大のものとなるまで成長するのを見守ったと考えるのでなければならない。三つの角がその前に倒れ、それは大きさにおいて他のすべての角を追い越し、ついに最も顕著なものとなったのである。これは、この第十一の角によって指されている王国あるいは権威が、他のいずれよりも明確で顕著なものとなること、事実上、獣のすべての力を集中し体現するほどに目立ち、重要なものとなることを明確に示すものであろう。
Original em inglês
And of the ten horns ... - See the notes at Daniel 7:7-8.
Whose look was more stout than his fellows - literally, "whose aspect was greater than that of its companions." This does not mean that its look or aspect was more fierce or severe than that of the others, but that the appearance of the horn was greater - רב rab. In Daniel 7:8, this is described as a "little horn;" and to understand this, and reconcile the two, we must suppose that the seer watched this as it grew until it became the largest of the number. Three fell before it, and it outgrew in size all the others until it became the most prominent. This would clearly denote that the kingdom or the authority referred to by this eleventh horn would be more distinct and prominent than either of the others - would become so conspicuous and important as in fact to concentrate and embody all the power of the beast.
21
Daniel 7:21
日本語
「私が見ていると、その角は聖徒たちと戦争をした」——私は、この角が神の民と戦争をしているのを見るまで、これを見続けたのである。この事情も最初の描写には言及されておらず、描写の時間順序から、聖徒たちとの戦争は、その角の最初の出現からかなり後の時期に、あるいはそれがその大きな規模と力に成長してはじめて起こるであろうことが示唆されるように思われる。この「戦争」は、通常の戦争の方法で行われる公然の敵対行為を指すかもしれず、迫害を、あるいは他の人々の権利と特権へのいかなる侵害をも指すかもしれない。「聖徒たちとの戦争」である以上、これを迫害に結びつけるのが最も自然であろう。
「そして彼らに勝った」——すなわち、彼は彼らに打ち勝ってこれを服させた、彼は彼らよりも強く、彼らは彼に抵抗することができなかった、ということである。同じ出来事が、明らかに、ほとんど同様の言葉で――おそらくダニエルから借りて――Revelation 13:5-7に言及されている。「また、その口には誇りのことば、神をけがすことばを語る権威が与えられ、四十二か月のあいだ活動することを許された。彼は神に対してけがしことを口にし、神の御名と、その幕屋、すなわち天に住む者たちをけがした。また、聖徒たちに戦いをいどんで打ち勝つ権威が彼に与えられ、さらに、あらゆる部族、民族、国語、国民を支配する権威が彼に与えられた」。
Original em inglês
I beheld, and the same horn made war with the saints - I continued to look on this until I saw war made by this horn with the people of God. This circumstance, also, is not referred to in the first description, and the order of time in the description would seem to imply that the war with the saints would be at a considerable period after the first appearance of the horn, or would be only when it had grown to its great size and power. This "war" might refer to open hostilities, carried on in the usual manner of war; or to persecution, or to any invasion of the rights and privileges of others. As it is a "war with the saints," it would be most natural to refer it to persecution.
And prevailed against them - That is, he overcame and subdued them, he was stronger than they were, and they were not able to resist him. The same events are evidently referred to and in almost similar language - borrowed probably from Daniel - in Revelation 13:5-7 : "And there was given him a mouth speaking great things and blasphemies, and power was given unto him to continue forty and two months. And he opened his mouth in blasphemy against God, to blaspheme his name, and his tabernacle, and them that dwell in heaven. And it was given him to make war with the saints, and to overcome them; and power was given him over all kindreds, and tongues, and nations."
22
Daniel 7:22
日本語
「年を経た方が来られて、ついに」——Daniel 7:9の注解を見よ。すなわち、これは、その角がその完全な大きさに成長し、聖徒たちとの戦争がなされ、彼らが打ち負かされた後に起こることであった。これが直ちに起こると断言しているのではないが、その後のある時期に、年を経た方が来られ、地の上に一つの王国を立て、あるいはその王国を聖徒たちに引き渡される、ということである。あたかも神ご自身が地の上に現れ、その支配を公然と彼らに引き渡されるかのような、それと同じくらい現実の移譲と、同じくらい実際の独特な王国の設立があるであろう。
「いと高き者の聖徒たちにさばきが与えられ」——すなわち、その王国が彼らの手に渡されるという厳粛なさばきの行為が、この件にはあったのである。それは、獣に対してさばきが宣告され、彼が有罪とされて倒され、かつて彼が持っていた支配権が、いと高き者のしもべたちに引き渡されるかのような、それと同じくらい現実の移譲であった。
「聖徒たちが国を所有する時が来た」——彼らが地を治めること、善い人々が法律を制定し執行すること、宗教の諸原則が行き渡ってすべての人の心に影響を及ぼし、義と正義が行われるようになること、である。人の心と生活を支配し、あらゆる状況においてなさるべきことをするように彼らを促す、まことの宗教の普遍的普及は、ここに述べられているすべての完全な成就となるであろう。ここまでが、ダニエルが見たものであり、彼がその解き明かしをこれほど切望したものの描写である。これに解き明かしが続き、本章の残りの部分を占めている。
Original em inglês
Until the Ancient of days came - Notes, Daniel 7:9. That is, this was to occur after the horn grew to its full size, and after the war was made with the saints, and they had been overcome. It does not affirm that this would occur immediately, but that at some subsequent period the Ancient of days would come, and would set up a kingdom on the earth, or would make over the kingdom to the saints. There would be as real a transfer and as actual a setting up of a peculiar kingdom, as if God himself should appear on the earth, and should publicly make over the dominion to them.
And judgment was given to the saints of the Most High - That is, there was a solemn act of judgement in the case by which the kingdom was given to their hands. It was as real a transfer as if there had been a judgment pronounced on the beast, and he had been condemned and overthrown, and as if the dominion which he once had should be made over to the servants of the Most High.
And the time came that the saints possessed the kingdom - That they ruled on the earth; that good men made and administered the laws; that the principles of religion prevailed, influencing the hearts of all men, and causing righteousness and justice to be done. The universal prevalence of true religion, in controlling the hearts and lives of men, and disposing them to do what in all circumstances ought to be done, would be a complete fulfillment of all that is here said. Thus far the description of what Daniel saw, of which he was so desirous to obtain an explanation. The explanation follows, and embraces the remainder of the chapter.
23
Daniel 7:23
日本語
「彼はこう言った……」——すなわち、現れた第四の象徴――第四の獣――と、その出現に結びついた出来事とを解き明かしたものである。この解き明かしは本章の残りの部分を包含し、解き明かしの前には全体の主題がダニエルに困難で重大なものに見えたのと同じく、今日でも多くの点で困難であり、あらゆる点で重大と言うべきものである。これが何を指すのか、すでに成就したのか、それともなお未来に及ぶのかについて、聖書の解釈者たちは決して一致していない。それゆえ、可能ならば、その真の意味を決定することが重要である。私たちの前に正当に置かれている二つの問いは、第一に、御使の用いた解き明かしの言葉は何を正当に含意するか――すなわち、これらの言葉の公正な解釈によれば、言及された出来事はどのような経過をたどるであろうか、またこの成就として地上で実際に何が起こるのを当然期待すべきか。第二に、この預言は実際にどの出来事に適用されるか――すでに起こったことに適用されるのか、それともなお起こるべきことに適用されるのか。すでに過去となった事がらの中に、これの成就を見出しうるか、それとも、その一部がなお未来であるような出来事に適用されるべきか、である。このことは、この王国に関して起こると断言される事項の叙述へと、そして次にその適用の探究へと私たちを導くであろう。
御使の解き明かしに正当に含意されるものは何か。それは次の諸点を包含する。
(1) 地の上に第四の王国があることであった。「あの第四の獣は、地の上の第四の王国である」(Daniel 7:23)。これは、獅子、熊、豹によって象徴された他の三つの王国に続くものであった。それらについてはそれ以上言及されないが、この王国の特徴は十分に述べられている。Daniel 7:7の注解において説明され、ここで繰り返されているそれらの特徴は、 (a) それは重要な点において他のものたちと異なるであろうこと、 (b) 全地を飲み込み、服させるであろうこと、 (c) これを踏みつけ、これを打ち砕くであろうこと、すなわち、凶暴で好戦的な性格の普遍的な王朝として、力によって全世界を服従させ、従属させておくことであった。
(2) この主権あるいは支配権から、十の権力が立ち上がるであろう (Daniel 7:24)。「その十の角はこの王国から起こる十人の王である」。Daniel 7:7の注解を比較せよ。すなわち、それらはこの一つの支配権から生じるのであり、この支配権がこれらのより小さな主権たちに分割されるが、それらはみな明らかに一つの王国から出て、同じ力をふるうものである。私たちは当然、この成就を王の継承の中に求めることはしないであろう。そのような継承は、全体の支配権あるいは王朝を表す獣そのものによって象徴されていたはずだからである。むしろ、一つの権力から何らかの仕方で生じた、あるいは今やその一つの支配権の力を所有し、これをふるっている、同時代の複数の権力の中に求めるべきである。ここで言及される王国がこのような数の権力に分割されるか、あるいは何らかの仕方でこれらの権力がこの権威を所有し、これをふるうようになるなら、そのような事実が、私たちがこの王国の中に見出すべきと期待することを表すのである。
(3) これらの主権あるいは王国のただ中から、独特な特徴を持つもう一つのものが生じることであった (Daniel 7:24-25)。それらの特徴は次のとおりである。 (a) それは他のものたちから出るか、いわば同一の力の経営の一形態であるかのようなものであること。第十一の角が十の角と同じ源から出たのと同様であり、それゆえ私たちは、この権力の行使を、同じ王国あるいは王朝と何らかの仕方で結びついた中に求めるべきである。 (b) これは十のものと同時には生じず、それらの「後」に起こること。それゆえ私たちは、ある意味でそれらに続く権力としてこれを求めるべきである。 (c) それは初めは小さいこと (Daniel 7:8の角がそうであったように)。それゆえ私たちは、初めは弱い権力の中にその成就を求めるべきである。 (d) それは強大な権力に成長すること。小さな角は、他の三つの角を引き抜くほど強大になったのであり (Daniel 7:8)、解き明かしの中でも (Daniel 7:24)、彼が三人の王を服させるであろうと言われているからである。 (e) それは「三人の王」を、すなわち十のうちの三つを服させること。それゆえ私たちは、文字どおりにそのうちの三つが倒されるか、あるいはその力の約三分の一が奪い取られるような、その権力の現れの中に成就を求めるべきである。ただし、「三」という正確な数への言及は、むしろそのような正確な成就、すなわち立ち上がる新しい権力による三つの主権の倒壊を期待すべきことを示唆するように思われる。 (f) それは高ぶり、野心に満ち、特に神に対して横柄であること。「彼はいと高き者に逆らって大言を吐く」(Daniel 7:25)。ここで「逆らって」と訳されているカルデヤ語 לצד letsad は、文字どおりには、それの側で、それの部分に向かってを意味し、次いで「に逆らって」を意味する。ヴルガートは contra、ギリシヤ語は πρὸς pros。これは、神を直接にけがす者、その支配と権威に反逆する者、その経綸と律法に不満を述べる者、その真の要求に対して荒々しく非難の言葉を吐く者において成就するであろう。これは明らかに、まことの神の要求と権威への公然の敵対者において、あるいはその主張全体の精神と態度が、事実上、神に対して大言を吐くことと正当に解しうる者において、成就を見出すであろう。 (g) これは迫害する権力であること。「いと高き者の聖徒たちを悩ます」(Daniel 7:25)。すなわち、まことの聖徒たち、真に神の友であり、神に仕える者たちの迫害を特徴とするのである。 (h) それは立法権、確立された慣習と律法を変える権威を主張すること。「時と律法を変えようと望む」(Daniel 7:25)。「望む」と訳された語 (סבר sebar) は、より正確には、望む、期待するの意であり、ここでの考えは、彼が時と律法を変えることを望み、それができると期待している、ということである。ヴルガートは Putabit quod possit mutare tempora 等。ここで言及される心の状態は、言及される時と律法に関して変化を生じさせたいと願い、自分はそれを成し遂げられると希望する者のそれである。これをしたいという強い願いがあり、何らかの仕方でそれを実現できるという確信があるなら、それはここでのこの語の使用に含意されることを満たすであろう。祭礼その他の機会のために定められた既存の時と、既存の律法とに関して、ある種の権威を行使すること、そして自分自身の目的を達するようにこれらを変えようとする意図が、そこにはあるであろう。
「時」という語 זמנין zı̂mnı̂yn は、本来、祭礼などのために定められた時のように、ある明示された、指定された時を指すように思われる。ゲゼニウスは「時、特に定められた時、季節」とする。Ecclesiastes 3:1; Nehemiah 2:6; Esther 9:27, Esther 9:31を見よ。レンゲルケはこの語を Fest-Zeiten――「祭礼の時」――と訳し、聖なる時、祭礼の日を意味すると説明する (Leviticus 23:2, Leviticus 23:4, Leviticus 23:37, Leviticus 23:44)。この言及は、疑いなく、祭礼あるいは断食として分别されて聖別された期間――宗教の礼拝に捧げられた季節――に対するものである。そして、ここで言及される権力が立て、また望む種類の管轄権は、これらの期間を支配し、既存のものを廃止するか、他のものと取り替えることによって、それらを変えて自分自身の目的を達成することであろう。これらの季節は、常に宗教の状態と進展とに直接のつながりを持っていた。既存の祭礼を廃止し、あるいは他のものに置き換え、あるいは新しい祭礼を定める権威を持つ者は、宗教という主題全体の上に、また一国民の上に、重要な支配力を持つのである。
ここで「律法」と訳されている語 דת dâth は、いかなる法をも指しうるが、より適切には宗教に関する律法を表す。Daniel 6:5, Daniel 6:7, Daniel 6:12 (Daniel 6:6, Daniel 6:9, Daniel 6:13); Ezra 7:12, Ezra 7:21を見よ。レンゲルケも同様に、宗教の律法、あるいは宗教に関することとして説明する。それゆえ、この箇所で言及される管轄権の種類は、宗教の律法と制度に関わるものであろう。それはこれらを支配しようとする目的であり、既存のものを廃止し、新しいものを制定する権利の主張であり、自分自身の目的を促進するような仕方でこの権力を行使しようとする決意であろう。
(i) それは定められた期間続くこと。「聖徒たちは、一つの時と、二つの時と、半ばの時の間、彼の手にゆだねられる」(Daniel 7:25)。「彼ら」とは、それらの律法、あるいは民、言及された力々のことである。マウアーはこれを「いと高き者の聖徒たち」に結びつけ、彼らが彼の手に渡されるという意味にとる。これは明示されてはいないが、彼がこの期間の間、聖徒たちの上に管轄権を持つという意味としては、おそらく最も自然な解釈である。そうであるなら、その意味は、彼が指定された期間――一つの時、二つの時、半ばの時――の間、彼らを絶対的に支配し、あるいは彼らの上に支配権を立てる、ということである。「一つの時、二つの時、半ばの時」という表現については、解釈者たちの間に大きな意見の相違があり、また将来の出来事に関する多くの論争が、これと、ヨハネの黙示録に現れる同様の表現に付される意味にかかっていることは、言うまでもない。第一の、そして主要な問いは、もちろん、その文字どおりの、本来の意味に関するものである。ここで「時、時たち、時」と訳されている語 עדן עדנין ‛ı̂dânı̂yn ‛ı̂dân は、それ自体としては、私たちの「時」という語以上に、いかなる確定した固定の期間をも示さない語である。 Daniel 2:8-9, Daniel 2:21; Daniel 3:5, Daniel 3:15; Daniel 4:16, Daniel 4:23, Daniel 4:25, Daniel 4:32; Daniel 7:12を見よ。これらの実例のうちいくつかでは、実際に言及された期間は一年であったが (Daniel 4:16, Daniel 4:23)、これは用いられた語に必然的に含意されるものではなく、その事の場合の事情がその限定を要求しているのである。語そのものに関しては、それは一日、一週、一月、一年、あるいはより大きい、より小さい時間の区分を表しうるのであり、実際に指定しようとする期間は文脈から決定されなければならない。ラテン語ヴルガートは不定であり――ad tempus。ギリシヤ語も同様に ἕως καιροῦ heōs kairou、シリヤ語も、ルターも eine Zeit、レンゲルケも eine Zeit である。「一つの時の間」という句が原語の意味を正確に表している。「時たち」と訳された語は同じ語の複数形であるが、明らかに双数的な意味を持つ。――ゲゼニウス『辞典』、レンゲルケの同箇所。その明白な意味は、前の「一つの時」によって示されるものが二つ、ということである。
「半ばの時」という句は、明らかにそのような期間の半分を意味する。それゆえ、もしここでの「一つの時」で示される期間が一年であれば、全体の期間は三年半となる。このような、あるいはこの同じ期間の指定は、預言 (ダニエル書と黙示録) の中に数回現れ、その意味には、将来に関する預言の解釈に関して多くのことがかかっている。この三年半の期間は四十二か月、すなわち千二百六十日に等しく、これはRevelation 11:2; Revelation 12:6に言及されている期間であり、あの書の解釈において多くがこれに依存している。ここで指定された期間に関する唯一の重要な問題は、これを文字どおり三年半を表すものとして受け取るべきか、それとも、一日ずつが一年を表すという象徴的方法を採用し、こうしてここで言及される時を実際には千二百六十年とみなすべきか、である。この問題について解釈者たちは分かれており、おそらく今後も分かれ続けるであろう。そして一方または他方の見解が採用されるのに応じて、彼らはここの出来事をアンティオコス・エピファネスに、あるいは教皇権に帰するのである。より正確に言えば、ここの出来事をアンティオコスに帰そうとするか教皇権に帰そうとするかの傾向に応じて、彼らは日々の意味に関する一方または他方の解釈の方法を受け入れるのである。この箇所の吟味のこの地点において、唯一の目的は、これを釈義的に見ること、適用から切り離された言語として、いかなる適用の目的にも偏りなく検討することである。絶対的な確実性はおそらく得られないが、次の事柄は釈義的にありそうなこととみなされよう。
(1) 「時」という語は、一年を表すものとみなされうる。一週、一月、あるいは他の期間ではなく、一年を意味するのである。一年はより明確で重要な時間の部分であり、一日、一週、一月はあまりに短く、意図されたものと合理的に考えることができないからである。一年より大きい自然の期間はなく、「時」という語によって適切に示唆されるほど明確で明白な自然の周期は存在しないのであり、そのような周期が意図されると考えてはならない。また、ここで用いられている「一つの時と、二つの時と、半ばの時」という言語には非常に特殊性があるので、何らかの確定した明確な期間が意図されており、一般的な時間ではないと推定されるべきである。それゆえ、その語のある意味において、一年の期間が言及されていると推定してよい。
(2) この言語は、文字どおりの一年への適用を禁じない。その場合、実際に指定される時間は三年半となる。そのような解釈がこの言語に与えられても、いかなる釈義の法則も、言語自体の何ものも、侵されたとはみなされず、この点に関する限り、議論の余地はないであろう。
(3) この言語の象徴的な適用についても同じことが言える。すなわち、文字どおりの三年半よりはるかに長い期間として、すなわち各々の日を一年に立て、こうして千二百六十年を表すものとみなすことである。これは、預言の慣用に対する違反であるとか、預言的言語の性質によって禁じられているとは示しえない。象徴ほどありふれたものはなく、そのような解釈が理解されなければならない実際の実例があるからである。こうしてEzekiel 4:6では、預言者が四十日間その右の側に寝るよう命じられたとき、それが象徴的、表徴的であることが明示されている。「わたしはあなたに、一日を一年に当てて定めた」。ここの時が象徴的であり、文字通りの解釈が要求するよりも長い期間が言及されうると想定することが、預言の慣用と厳密に一致することを、だれも疑うことはできない。
(4) さらに、適用の問題をいっさい考慮に入れず、言語の解釈のみに関してこの箇所を見ても、これをありそうなものと見せるいくつかの事情がある、と付け加えることができる。それらの事情は次のとおりである。 (a) 預言においては、時間を文字どおりに指定することはまれであるという事実。そうされている実例はほとんど挙げられない。通常は、何らかの象徴、しるし、言及される時あるいは時代の特徴によって指定がなされ、あるいは、出来事が起こったときに理解されうる何らかの象徴によってなされる。 (b) この時間の指定は、象徴のただ中で――すべてが象徴であるところで、すなわち獣たち、角たち、小さな角などの中で――現れる。それゆえ、言及される時を指定するにあたっては、文字通りの方法よりも、そのような方法が採用された可能性の方がはるかに大きいように思われる。 (c) この箇所をただ読むだけでも、出来事が実際に遠い未来へと、三年半という短い期間によって表されるものをはるかに超えて及んでいることがかなり明白である。これは、これらの預言の意味についての探究において、他の箇所でより十分に考察されるであろう。(黙示録の巻の編者への序文も見よ。)
(4) 解き明かしをした者がダニエルに与えた説明の第四の点は、この権力に関する厳粛なさばきが行われ、しばらくの間聖徒たちの上に許された支配権が完全に取り去られ、権力自体が滅ぼされるであろう、ということである。「しかし、さばきが開かれると、彼らはその支配権を取り去って、これをついに絶やし、滅ぼし尽くす」(Daniel 7:26)。すなわち、それは取り去られ、完全に終わりに至る。解き明かしをした者は、これがだれによってなされるかを語らないが、その事実と、支配権の滅亡が最終的なものであることを断言する。すなわち、それは完全に、永遠にやむであろう。これは神のさばきの行いによって、あるいはあたかも厳粛な裁きが開かれ、判決が言い渡されるかのように、なされるであろう。それは、神が裁き主として座に着き、判決を宣べられるかのように、明白に神の行いとなるであろう。Daniel 7:9-11の注解を見よ。
(5) そして、解き明かしをした者の説明の第五の点は、天の下全体の支配権がいと高き者の聖徒たちに与えられ、すべての国民が彼に仕えるであろう、ということである。すなわち、義が地の上に広く行き渡り、神が人の心と生活のうちに治められるであろう、ということである (Daniel 7:27)。Daniel 7:13-14の注解を見よ。
Original em inglês
Thus he said ... - That is, in explanation of the fourth symbol which appeared - the fourth beast, and of the events connected with his appearing. This explanation embraces the remainder of the chapter; and as the whole subject appeared difficult and momentous to Daniel before the explanation, so it may be said to be in many respects difficult, and in all respects momentous still. It is a question on which expositors of the Scriptures are by no means agreed, to what it refers, and whether it has been already accomplished, or whether it extends still into the future; and it is of importance, therefore, to determine, if possible, what is its true meaning. The two points of inquiry which are properly before us are, first, What do the words of explanation as used by the angel fairly imply - that is, what, according to the fair interpretation of these words, would be the course of events referred to, or what should we naturally expect to find as actually occurring on the earth in the fulfillment of this? and, secondly, To what events the prophecy is actually to be applied - whether to what has already occurred, or what is yet to occur; whether we can find anything in what is now past which would be an accomplishment of this, or whether it is to be applied to events a part of which are yet future? This will lead us into a statement of the points which it is affirmed would occur in regard to this kingdom: and then into an inquiry respecting the application.
What is fairly implied in the explanation of the angel? This would embrace the following points:
(1) There was to be a fourth kingdom on the earth: "the fourth beast shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth," Daniel 7:23. This was to succeed the other three, symbolized by the lion, the bear, and the leopard. No further reference is made to them, but the characteristics of this are fully stated. Those characteristics, which have been explained in the notes at Daniel 7:7, are, as here repeated,
(a) that it would be in important respects different from the others;
(b) that it would devour, or subdue the whole earth;
(c) that it would tread it down and break it in pieces; that is, it would be a universal dynasty, of a fierce and warlike character, that would keep the whole world subdued and subject by power.
(2) out of this sovereignty or dominion, ten powers would arise Daniel 7:24 : "and the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kings that shall arise." Compare the notes at Daniel 7:7. That is, they would spring out of this one dominion, or it would be broken up into these minor sovereignties, yet all manifestly springing from the one kingdom, and wielding the same power. We should not naturally look for the fulfillment of this in a succession of kings, for that would have been symbolized by the beast itself representing the entire dominion or dynasty, but rather to a number of contemporaneous powers that had somehow sprung out of the one power, or that now possessed and wielded the power of that one dominion. If the kingdom here referred to should be broken up into such a number of powers, or if in any way these powers became possessed of this authority, and wielded it, such a fact would express what we are to expect to find in this kingdom.
(3) From the midst of these sovereignties or kingdoms there was to spring up another one of peculiar characteristics, Daniel 7:24-25. These characteristics are the following:
(a) That it would spring out of the others, or be, as it were, one form of the administration of the same power - as the eleventh horn sprang from the same source as the ten, and we are, therefore, to look for the exercise of this power somehow in connection with the same kingdom or dynasty.
(b) This would not spring up contemporaneously with the ten, but would arise "after them" - and we are to look for the power as in some sense succeeding them.
(c) It would be small at first - as was the horn Daniel 7:8, and we are to look for the fulfillment in some power that would be feeble at first.
(d) It would grow to be a mighty power for the little horn became so powerful as to pluck up three of the others Daniel 7:8, and it is said in the explanation Daniel 7:24, that he would subdue three of the kings.
(e) It would subdue "three kings;" that is, three of the ten, and we are to look for the fulfillment in some manifestation of that power by which, either literally three of them were overthrown, or by which about one-third of their power was taken away. The mention of the exact number of "three," however, would rather seem to imply that we are to expect some such exact fulfillment, or some prostration of three sovereignties by the new power that would arise.
(f) It would be proud, and ambitious, and particularly arrogant against God: "and he shall speak great words against the Most High," Daniel 7:25. The Chaldee here rendered against - לצד letsad - means, literally, at, or against the part of it, and then against. Vulgate contra; Greek πρὸς pros. This would be fulfilled in one who would blaspheme God directly; or who would be rebellious against his government and authority; or who would complain of his administration and laws; or who would give utterance to harsh and reproachful words against his real claims. It would find a fulfillment obviously in an open opposer of the claims and the authority of the true God; or in one the whole spirit and bearing of whose pretensions might be fairly construed as in fact an utterance of great words against him.
(g) This would be a persecuting power: "and shall wear out the saints of the Most High," Daniel 7:25. That is, it would be characterized by a persecution of the real saints - of those who were truly the friends of God, and who served him.
(h) It would claim legislative power, the power of changing established customs and laws: "and think to change times and laws," Daniel 7:25. The word rendered "think" (סבר sebar) means, more properly, to hope; and the idea here is, that he hopes and trusts to be able to change times and laws. Vulgate, Putabit quod possit mutare tempora, etc. The state of mind here referred to would be that of one who would desire to produce changes in regard to the times and laws referred to, and who would hope that he would be able to effect it. If there was a strong wish to do this, and if there was a belief that in any way he could bring it about, it would meet what is implied in the use of the word here. There would be the exercise of some kind of authority in regard to existing times for festivals, or other occasions, and to existing laws, and there would be a purpose so to change them as to accomplish his own ends.
The word "times" - זמנין zı̂mnı̂yn - would seem to refer properly to some stated or designated times - as times appointed for festivals, etc. Gesenius, "time, specially an appointed time, season:" Ecclesiastes 3:1; Nehemiah 2:6; Esther 9:27, Esther 9:31. Lengerke renders the word Fest-Zeiten - "festival times," and explains it as meaning the holy times, festival days, Leviticus 23:2, Leviticus 23:4, Leviticus 23:37, Leviticus 23:44. The allusion is, undoubtedly, to such periods set apart as festivals or fasts - seasons consecrated to the services of religion and the kind of jurisdiction which the power here referred to would hope and desire to set up would be to have control of these periods, and so to change and alter them as to accomplish his own purposes - either by abolishing those in existence, or by substituting others in their place. At all times these seasons have had a direct connection with the state and progress of religion; and he who has power over them, either to abolish existing festivals, or to substitute others in their places, or to appoint new festivals, has an important control over the whole subject of religion, and over a nation.
The word rendered "laws" here - דת dâth - while it might refer to any law, would more properly designate laws pertaining to religion. See Daniel 6:5, Daniel 6:7, Daniel 6:12 (Daniel 6:6, Daniel 6:9, Daniel 6:13); Ezra 7:12, Ezra 7:21. So Lengerke explains it as referring to the laws of religion, or to religion. The kind of jurisdiction, therefore, referred to in this place would be what would pertain to the laws and institutions of religion; it would be a purpose to obtain the control of these; it would be a claim of right to abolish such as existed, and to institute new ones; it would be a determination to exert this power in such a way as to promote its own ends.
(i) It would continue for a definite period: "and they shall be given into his hands until a time and times and the dividing of time," Daniel 7:25. They; that is, either those laws, or the people, the powers referred to. Maurer refers this to the "saints of the Most High," as meaning that they would be delivered into his hands. Though this is not designated expressly, yet perhaps it is the most natural construction, as meaning that he would have jurisdiction over the saints during this period; and if so, then the meaning is, that he would have absolute control over them, or set up a dominion over them, for the time specified the time, and times, etc. In regard to this expression "a time and times, etc., it is unnecessary to say that there has been great diversity of opinion among expositors, and that many of the controversies in respect to future events turn on the sense attached to this and to the similar expressions which occur in the book of Revelation. The first and main inquiry pertains, of course, to its literal and proper signification. The word used here rendered "time, times, time" - עדן עדנין ‛ı̂dânı̂yn ‛ı̂dân - is a word which in itself would no more designate any definite and fixed period than our word time does.
See Daniel 2:8-9, Daniel 2:21; Daniel 3:5, Daniel 3:15; Daniel 4:16, Daniel 4:23, Daniel 4:25, Daniel 4:32; Daniel 7:12. In some of these instances, the period actually referred to was a year Daniel 4:16, Daniel 4:23, but this is not necessarily implied in the word used, but the limitation is demanded by the circumstances of the case. So far as the word is concerned, it would denote a day, a week, a month, a year, or a larger or smaller division of time, and the period actually intended to be designated must be determined from the connection. The Latin Vulgate is indefinite - ad tempus; so the Greek - ἕως καιροῦ heōs kairou; so the Syriac, and so Luther - eine Zeit; and so Lengerke - eine Zeit. The phrase "for a time" expresses accurately the meaning of the original word. The word rendered "times" is the same word in the plural, though evidently with a dual signification. - Gesenius, Lexicon; Lengerke, in loc. The obvious meaning is two such times as is designated by the former "time."
The phrase "and the dividing of a time" means clearly half of such a period. Thus, if the period denoted by a "time," here be a year, the whole period would be three years and a half. Designations of time like this, or of this same period, occur several times in the prophecies (Daniel and Revelation), and on their meaning much depends in regard to the interpretation of the prophecies pertaining to the future. This period of three years and a half equals forty-two months, or twelve hundred and sixty days - the periods mentioned in Revelation 11:2; Revelation 12:6, and on which so much depends in the interpretation of that book. The only question of importance in regard to the period of time here designated is, whether this is to be taken literally to denote three years and a half, or whether a symbolic method is to be adopted, by making each one of the days represent a year, thus making the time referred to, in fact, twelve hundred and sixty years. On this question expositors are divided, and probably will continue to be, and according as one or the other view is adopted, they refer the events here to Antiochus Epiphanes, or to the Papal power; or perhaps it should be said more accurately, according as they are disposed to refer the events here to Antiochus or to the Papacy, do they embrace one or the other method of interpretation in regard to the meaning of the days. At this point in the examination of the passage, the only object is to look at it exegetically; to examine it as language apart from the application, or unbiassed by any purpose of application; and though absolute certainty cannot perhaps be obtained, yet the following may be regarded as exegetically probable:
(1) The word time may be viewed as denoting a year: I mean a year rather than a week, a month, or any other period - because a year is a more marked and important portion of time, and because a day, a week, a month, is so short that it cannot be reasonably supposed that it is intended. As there is no larger natural period than a year - no cycle in nature that is so marked and obvious as to be properly suggested by the word time, it cannot be supposed that any such cycle is intended. And as there is so much particularity in the language used here, "a time, and times, and half a time," it is to be presumed that some definite and marked period is intended, and that it is not time in general. It may be presumed, therefore, that in some sense of the term the period of a year is referred to.
(2) The language does not forbid the application to a literal year, and then the actual time designated would be three years and a half. No laws of exegesis, nothing in the language itself, could be regarded as violated, if such an interpretation were given to the language, and so far as this point is concerned, there would be no room for debate.
(3) The same remark may be made as to the symbolic application of the language - taking it for a much longer period than literally three years and a half; that is, regarding each day as standing for a year, and thus considering it as denoting twelve hundred and sixty years. This could not be shown to be a violation of prophetic usage, or to be forbidden by the nature of prophetic language, because nothing is more common than symbols, and because there are actual instances in which such an interpretation must be understood. Thus in Ezekiel 4:6, where the prophet was commanded to lie upon his right side forty days, it is expressly said that it was symbolic or emblematic: "I have appointed thee each day for a year." No one can doubt that it would be strictly consistent with prophetic usage to suppose that the time here might be symbolic, and that a longer time might be referred to than the literal interpretation would require.
(4) It may be added, that there are some circumstances, even considering the passage with reference only to the interpretation of the language, and with no view to the question of its application, which would make this appear probable. Among these circumstances are the following:
(a) the fact that, in the prophecies, it is unusual to designate the time literally. Very few instances can be referred to in which this is done. It is commonly by some symbol; some mark; some peculiarity of the time or age referred to, that the designation is made, or by some symbol that may be understood when the event has occurred.
(b) This designation of time occurs in the midst of symbols - where all is symbol - the beasts, the horns, the little horn, etc.; and it would seem to be much more probable that such method would be adopted as designating the time referred to than a literal method.
(c) It is quite apparent on the mere perusal of the passage here that the events do actually extend far into the future - far beyond what would be denoted by the brief period of three and a half years. This will be considered more fully in another place in the inquiry as to the meaning of these prophecies. (See also Editor's Preface to volume on Revelation.)
(4) a fourth point in the explanation given by the interpreter to Daniel is, that there would be a solemn judgment in regard to this power, and that the dominion conceded to it over the saints for a time would be utterly taken away, and the power itself destroyed: "but the judgment shall sit, and they shall take away his dominion, to consume, and to destroy it unto the end," Daniel 7:26. That is, it shall be taken away; it shall come entirely to an end. The interpreter does not say by whom this would be done, but he asserts the fact, and that the destruction of the dominion would be final. That is, it would entirely and forever cease. This would be done by an act of Divine judgment, or as if a solemn judgment should be held, and a sentence pronounced. It would be as manifestly an act of God as if he should sit as a judge, and pronounce sentence. See the notes at Daniel 7:9-11.
(5) And, a fifth point in the explanation of the interpreter is, that the dominion under the whole heaven would be given to the saints of the Most High, and that all nations should serve him; that is, that there would be a universal prevalence of righteousness on the earth, and that God would reign in the hearts and lives of men, Daniel 7:27. See the notes at Daniel 7:13-14.
28
Daniel 7:28
日本語
Ainda sem tradução.
Original em inglês
Hitherto is the end of the matter - That is, the end of what I saw and heard. This is the sum of what was disclosed to the prophet, but he still says that he meditated on it with profound interest, and that he had much solicitude in regard to these great events. The words rendered hitherto, mean, so far, or thus far. The phrase "end of the matter," means "the close of the saying a thing;" that is, this was all the revelation which was made to him, and he was left to his own meditations respecting it.
As for me Daniel - So far as I was concerned; or so far as this had any effect on me. It was not unnatural, at the close of this remarkable vision, to state the effect that it had on himself.
My cogitations much troubled me - My thoughts in regard to it. It was a subject which he could not avoid reflecting on, and which could not but produce deep solicitude in regard to the events which were to occur. Who could look into the future without anxious and agitating thought? These events were such as to engage the profoundest attention; such as to fix the mind in solemn thought. Compare the notes at Revelation 5:4.
And my countenance changed in me - The effect of these revelations depicted themselves on my countenance. The prophet does not say in what way - whether by making him pale, or careworn, or anxious, but merely that it produced a change in his appearance. The Chaldee is "brightness" - זיו zı̂yv - and the meaning would seem to be, that his bright and cheerful countenance was changed; that is, that his bright looks were changed; either by becoming pale (Gesenius, Lengerke), or by becoming serious and thoughtful.
But I kept the matter in my heart - I communicated to no one the cause of my deep and anxious thoughts. He hid the whole subject in his own mind, until he thought proper to make this record of what he had seen and heard. Perhaps there was no one to whom he could communicate the matter who would credit it; perhaps there was no one at court who would sympathize with him; perhaps he thought that it might savor of vanity if it were known; perhaps he felt that as no one could throw any new light on the subject, there would be no use in making it a subject of conversation; perhaps he felt so overpowered that he could not readily converse on it.
We are prepared now, having gone through with an exposition of this chapter, as to the meaning of the symbols, the words, and the phrases, to endeavor to ascertain what events are referred to in this remarkable prophecy, and to ask what events it was designed should be pourtrayed. And in reference to this there are but two opinions, or two classes of interpretations, that require notice: what refers it primarily and exclusively to Antiochus Epiphanes, and what refers it to the rise and character of the Papal power; what regards the fourth beast as referring to the empire of Alexander, and the little horn to Antiochus, and what regards the fourth beast as referring to the Roman empire, and the little horn to the Papal dominion. In inquiring which of these is the true interpretation, it will be proper, first, to consider whether it is applicable to Antiochus Epiphanes; secondly, whether it in fact finds a fulfillment in the Roman empire and the Papacy; and, thirdly, if such is the proper application, what are we to look for in the future in what remains unfulfilled in regard to the prophecy.
I. The question whether it is applicable to the case of Antiochus Epiphanes. A large class of interpreters, of the most respectable character, among whom are Lengerke, Maurer, Prof. Stuart (Hints on the Interpretation of Prophecy, p. 86, following; also Com. on Daniel, pp. 205-211), Eichhorn, Bertholdt, Bleek, and many others, suppose that the allusion to Antiochus is clear, and that the primary, if not the exclusive, reference to the prophecy is to him. Professor Stuart (Hints, p. 86) says, "The passage in Daniel 7:25 is so clear as to leave no reasonable room for doubt." "In Daniel 7:8, Daniel 7:20, Daniel 7:24, the rise of Antiochus Epiphanes is described; for the fourth beast is, beyond all reasonable doubt, the divided Grecian dominion which succeeded the reign of Alexander the Great. From this dynasty springs Antiochus, Daniel 7:8, Daniel 7:20, who is most graphically described in Daniel 7:25 'as one who shall speak great words against the most High,' etc."
The facts in regard to Antiochus, so far as they are necessary to be known in the inquiry, are briefly these: Antiochus Epiphanes (the Illustrios, a name taken on himself, Prideaux, iii. 213), was the son of Antiochus the Great, but succeeded his brother, Seleucus Philopator, who died 176 b.c. Antiochus reigned over Syria, the capital of which was Antioch, on the Oronres, from 176 b.c. to 164 b.c. His character, as that of a cruel tyrant, and a most bloodthirsty and bitter enemy of the Jews, is fully detailed in the first and second book of Maccabees. Compare also Prideaux, Con. vol. iii.-213-234. The facts in the case of Antiochus, so far as they are supposed to bear on the application of the prophecy before us, are thus stated by Prof. Stuart (Hints on the Interpretation of Prophecy, pp. 89, 90): "In the year 168 before Christ, in the month of May, Antiochus Epiphanes was on his way to attack Egypt, and he detached Apollonius, one of his military confidants, with 22,000 soldiers, in order to subdue and plunder Jerusalem. The mission was executed with entire success. A horrible slaughter was made of the men at Jerusalem, and a large portion of the women and children, being made captives, were sold and treated as slaves. The services of the temple were interrupted, and its joyful feasts were turned into mourning, 1 Macc. 1:37-39. Soon after this the Jews in general were compelled to eat swine's flesh, and to sacrifice to idols. In December of that same year, the temple was profaned by introducing the statue of Jupiter Olympius; and on the 25th of that month sacrifices were offered to that idol on the altar of Jehovah. Just three years after this last event, namely, December 25, 165 b.c., the temple was expurgated by Judas Maccabeus, and the worship of Jehovah restored.
Thus, three years and a half, or almost exactly this period, passed away, while Antiochus had complete possession and control of everything in and around Jerusalem and the temple. It may be noted, also, that just three years passed, from the time when the profanation of the temple was carried to its greatest height - namely, by sacrificing to the statue of Jupiter Olympius on the altar of Jehovah, down to the time when Judas renewed the regular worship. I mention this last circumstance in order to account for the three years of Antiochus' profanations, which are named as the period of them in Joseptus, Ant. xii. 7, Section 6. This period tallies exactly with the time during which the profanation as consummated was carried on, if we reckon down to the period when the temple worship was restored by Judas Maceabeus. But in Prooem. ad Bell. Jud. Section 7, and Bell. Jude 1. 1, Section 1, Josephus reckons three years and a half as the period during which Antiochus ravaged Jerusalem and Judea."
In regard to this statement, while the general facts are correct, there are some additional statements which should be made, to determine as to its real bearing on the case. The act of detaching Apollonius to attack Jerusalem was not, as is stated in this extract, when Antiochus was on his way to Egypt, but was on his return from Egypt, and was just two years after Jerusalem had been taken by Antiochus. - Prideaux, iii. 239. The occasion of his detaching Apollonius, was that Antiochus was enraged because he had been defeated in Egypt by the Romans, and resolved to vent all his wrath upon the Jews, who at that time had given him no particular offence. When, two years before, Antiochus had himself taken Jerusalem, he killed forty thousand persons; he took as many captives, and sold them for slaves; he forced himself into the temple, and entered the most holy place; he caused a great sow to be offered on the altar of burnt-offering, to show his contempt for the temple and the Jewish religion; he sprinkled the broth over every part of the temple for the purpose of polluting it; he plundered the temple of the altar of incense, the showbread table, and the golden candlestick, and then returned to Antioch, having appointed Philip, a Phrygian, a man of a cruel and barbarous temper, to be governor of the Jews. - Prideaux, iii.231.
When Apollonius again attacked the city, two years afterward, he waited quietly until the Sabbath, and then made his assault. He filled the city with blood, set it on fire, demolished the houses, pulled down the walls, built a strong fortress over against the temple, from which the garrison could fall on all who should attempt to go to worship. From this time, "the temple became deserted, and the daily sacrifices were omitted," until the service was restored by Judas Maccabeus, three years and a half after. The time during which this continued was, in fact, just three years and a half, until Judas MaccaUcus succeeded in expelling the pagan from the temple and from Jerusalem, when the temple was purified, and was solemnly reconsecrated to the worship of God. See Prideaux, Con. iii. 240, 241, and the authorities there cited.
Now, in reference to this interpretation, supposing that the prophecy relates to Antiochus, it must be admitted that there are coincidences which are remarkable, and it is on the ground of these coincidences that the prophecy has been applied to him. These circumstances are such as the following:
(a) The general character of the authority that would exist as denoted by the "little horn," as that of severity and cruelty. None could be better fitted to represent that than the character of Antiochus Epiptianes. Compare Prideaux, Con. iii. 213, 214.
(b) His arrogance and blasphemy - "speaking great words against the Most High." Nothing is easier than to find what would be a fulfillment of this in the character of Antiochus - in his sacrilegious entrance into the most holy places; in his setting up the statue of Jupiter; in his offering a sow as a sacrifice on the great altar; in His sprinkling the broth of swine on the temple in contempt of the Hebrews and their worship, and in his causing the daily sacrifice at the temple to cease.
(c) His making war with the "saints," and "wearing out the saints of the Most High" - all this could be found accomplished in the wars which Antiochus waged against the Jews in the slaughter of so many thousands, and in sending so many into hopeless slavery.
(d) His attempt to "change times and laws" - this could be found to have been fulfilled in the case of Antiochus - in his arbitrary character, and in his interference with the laws of the Hebrews.
(e) The time, as above stated, is the most remarkable coincidence. If this is not to be regarded as referring exclusively to Antiochus, it must be explained on one of two suppositions - either that it is one of those coincidences which will be found to happen in history, as coincidences happen in dreams; or as having a double reference, intended to refer primarily to Antiochus, but in a secondary and more important sense referring also to other events having a strong resemblance to this; or, in other words, that the language was designedly so couched as to relate to two similar classes of events. It is not to be regarded as very remarkable, however, that it is possible to find a fulfillment of these predictions in Antiochus, though it be supposed that the design was to describe the Papacy, for some of the expressions are of so general a character that they could be applied to many events which have occurred, and, from the nature of the case, there were strong points of resemblance between Antiochus and the Papal power. It is not absolutely necessary, therefore, to suppose that this had reference to Antiochus Epiphanes; and there are so many objections to this view as to make it, it seems to me, morally impossible that it should have had such a reference. Among these objections are the following:
(1) This interpretation makes it necessary to divide the kingdom of the Medes and Persians, and to consider them two kingdoms, as Eichhorn, Jahn, Dereser, DeWette, and Bleek do. In order to this interpretation, the following are the kingdoms denoted by the four beasts - by the first, the Chaldee; by the second, the Medish; by the third, the Persian; and by the fourth, the Macedonian, or the Macedonian-Asiatic kingdom under Alexander the Great. But to say nothing now of any other difficulties, it is an insuperable objection to this, that so far as the kingdoms of the Medes and Persians are mentioned in Scripture, and so far as they play any part in the fulfillment of prophecy, they are always mentioned as one. They appear as one; they act as one; they are regarded as one. The kingdom of the Medes does not appear until it is united with that of the Persians, and this remark is of special importance when they are spoken of as succeeding the kingdom of Babylon. The kingdom of the Medes was contemporaneous with that of Babylon; it was the Mede-Persian kingdom that was in any proper sense the successor of that of Babylon, as described in these symbols. The kingdom of the Medes, as Hengstenberg well remarks, could in no sense be said to have succeeded that of Babylon any longer than during the reign of Cyaxares II, after the taking of Babylon: and even during that short period of two years, the government was in fact in the hands of Cyrus. - Die Authentic des Daniel, p. 200. Schlosser (p. 243) says, "the kingdom of the Medes and Persians is to be regarded as in fact one and the same kingdom, only that in the change of the dynasty another branch obtained the authority." See particularly, Rosenmuller, Alterthumskunde, i. 290, 291. These two kingdoms are in fact always blended - their laws, their customs, their religion, and they are mentioned as one. Compare Esther 1:3, Esther 1:18-19; Esther 10:2; Daniel 5:28; Daniel 6:8, Daniel 6:12, Daniel 6:15.
(2) In order to this interpretation, it is necessary to divide the empire founded by Alexander, and instead of regarding it as one, to consider what existed when he reigned as one; and that of Antiochus, one of the successors of Alexander, as another. This opinion is maintained by Bertholdt, who supposes that the first beast represented the Babylonian kingdom; the second, the kingdom of the Medes and Persians; the third, that of Alexander; and the fourth the kingdoms that sprang out of that. In order to this, it is necessary to suppose that the four heads and wings, and the ten horns, equally represent that kingdom, or sprang from it - the four heads, the kingdom when divided at the death of Alexander, and the ten horns, powers that ultimately sprang up from the same dominion. But this is contrary to the whole representation in regard to the Asiatic-Macedonian empire. In Daniel 8:8-9, where there is an undoubted reference to that empire, it is said "the he-goat waxed very great: and when he was strong, the great horn was broken; and for it came up four notable ones toward the four winds of heaven. And out of one of them came forth a little horn, which waxed exceeding great, toward the south, etc." Here is an undoubted allusion to Alexander, and to his followers, and particularly to Antiochus, but no mention of any such division as is necessary to be supposed if the fourth beast represents the power that succeeded Alexander in the East. In no place is the kingdom of the successors of Alexander divided from his in the same sense in which the kingdom of the Medes and Persians is from that of Babylon, or the kingdom of Alexander from that of the Persians. Compare Hengstenberg, as above, pp. 203-205.
(3) The supposition that the fourth beast represents either the kingdom of Alexander, or, according to Bertholdt and others, the successors of Alexander, by no means agrees with the character of that beast as compared with the others. That beast was far more formidable, and more to be dreaded than either of the others. It had iron teeth and brazen claws; it stamped down all before it, and broke all to pieces, and manifestly represented a far more fearful dominion than either of the others. The same is true in regard to the parallel representation in Daniel 2:33, Daniel 2:40, of the fourth kingdom represented by the legs and feet of iron, as more terrific than either of those denoted by the gold, the silver, or the brass. But this representation by no means agrees with the character of the kingdom of either Alexander or his successors, and in fact would not be true of them. It would agree well, as we shall see, with the Roman power, even as contrasted with that of Babylon, Persia, or Macedon; but it is not the representation which would, with propriety, be given of the empire of Alexander, or his successors, as contrasted with those which preceded them. Compare Hengstenberg, as above, pp. 205-207. Moreover, this does not agree with what is expressly said of this power that should succeed that of Alexander, in a passage undoubtedly referring to it, in Daniel 8:22, where it is said, "Now that being broken, whereas four stood up for it, four kingdoms shall stand up out of the nation, but not in his power."
(4) On this supposition it is impossible to determine who are meant by the "ten horns" of the fourth beast Daniel 7:7, and the "ten kings" Daniel 7:24 that are represented by these. All the statements in Daniel that refer to the Macedonian kingdom Daniel 7:6; Daniel 8:8, Daniel 8:22 imply that the Macedonian empire in the East, when the founder died, would be divided into four great powers or monarchies - in accordance with what is well known to have been the fact. But who are the ten kings or sovereignties that were to exist under this general Macedonian power, on the supposition that the fourth beast represents this? Bertholdt supposes that the ten horns are "ten Syrian kings," and that the eleventh little horn is Antiochus Epiphanes. The names of these kings, according to Bertholdt (pp. 432, 433), are Seleucus Nicator, Antiochus Sorer, Antiochus Theos, Seleucus Callinicus, Seleucus Ceraunus, Antiochus the Great, Seleucus Philopator, Heliodorus, Ptolemy Philometor, and Demetrius. So also Prof. Stuart, Com. on Dan. p. 208. But it is impossible to make out this exact number of Syrian kings from history, to say nothing now of the improbability of supposing that their power was represented by the fourth beast. These kings were not of the same dynasty, of Syria, of Macedonia, or of Egypt, but the list is made up of different kingdoms. Grotius (in loc.) forms the catalogue of ten kings out of the lists of the kings of Syria and Egypt - five out of one, and five out of the other; but this is manifestly contrary to the intention of the prophecy, which is to represent them as springing out of one and the same power. It is a further objection to this view, that these are lists of successive kings - rising up one after the other; whereas the representation of the ten horns would lead us to suppose that they existed simultaneously; or that somehow there were ten powers that sprang out of the one great power represented by the fourth beast.
(5) equally difficult is it, on this supposition, to know who are intended by the "three horns" that were plucked up by the little horn that sprang up among the ten, Daniel 7:8. Grotius, who regards the "little horn" as representing Antiochus Epiphanes, supposes that the three horns were his elder brothers, Seleucus, Demetrius, the son of Seleucus, and Ptolemy Philopator, king of Egypt. But it is an insuperable objection to this that the three kings mentioned by Grotius are not all in his list of ten kings, neither Ptolemy Philometor (if Philometor he meant), nor Demetrius being of the number. - Newton on the Proph. p. 211. Neither were they plucked up by the roots by Antiochus, or by his order. Seieueus was poisoned by his treasurer, Helioderus, whose aim it was to usurp the crown for himself, before Antiochus came from Rome, where he had been detained as a hostage for several years. Demetrius lived to dethrone and murder the son of Antiochus, and succeeded him in the kingdom of Syria. Ptolemy Philopater died king of Egypt almost thirty years before Antiochus came to the throne of Syria; or if Ptolemy Philometer, as is most probable, was meant by Grotius, though he suffered much in the wars with Antiochus, yet he survived him about eighteen years, and died in possession of the crown of Egypt. - Newton, ut supra. Bertlholdt supposes that the three kings were Heliodorus, who poisoned Seleucus Philopater, and sought, by the help of a party, to obtain the throne; Ptolemy Philometor, king of Egypt, who, as sister's son to the king, laid claim to the throne; and Demetrius, who, as son of the former king, was legitimate heir to the throne. But there are two objections to this view;
(a) that the representation by the prophet is of actual kings - which these were not; and
(b) that Antiochus ascended the throne peaceably; Demetrius, who would have been regarded as the king of Syria, not being able to make his title good, was detained as a hostage at Rome. Hengstenberg, pp. 207, 208. Prof Stuart, Com. on Dan., pp. 208, 209, supposes that the three kings referred to were Heliodorus, Ptolemy Philometer, and Demetrius I; but in regard to these it should be observed, that they were mere pretenders to the throne, whereas the text in Daniel supposes that they would be actual kings. Compare Hengstenberg, p. 208.
(6) The time mentioned here, on the supposition that literally three years and a half Daniel 7:25 are intended, does not agree with the actual dominion of Antiochus. In an undoubted reference to him in Daniel 8:13-14, it is said that "the vision concerning the daily sacrifice, and the transgression of desolation," would be "unto two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary be cleansed;" that is, one thousand and forty days, or some two years and ten months more than the time mentioned here. I am aware of the difficulty of explaining this (see Prof. Stuart, Hints on the Interpretation of Prophecy, p. 98, following), and the exact menning of the passage in Daniel 8:13-14, will come up for consideration hereafter; but it is an objection of some force to the application of the "time, and times, and dividing of a time" Daniel 7:25 to Antiochus, that it is not the same time which is applied to him elsewhere.
(7) And, one more objection to this application is, that, in the prophecy, it is said that he who was represented by the "little horn" would continue until "the Ancient of days should sit," and evidently until the kingdom should be taken by the one in the likeness of the Son of man, Daniel 7:9-10, Daniel 7:13-14, Daniel 7:21-22, Daniel 7:26. But if this refers to Antiochus, then these events must refer to the coming of the Messiah, and to the setting up of his kingdom in the world. Yet, as a matter of fact; Antiochus died about 164 years before the Saviour came, and there is no way of showing that he continued until the Messiah came in the flesh.
These objections to the opinion that this refers to Antiochus Epiphanes seem to me to be insuperable.
II. The question whether it refers to the Roman empire and the Papal power. The fair inquiry is, whether the things referred to in the vision actually find such a correspondence in the Roman empire and the Papacy, that they would fairly represent them if the symbols had been made use of after the events occurred. Are they such as we might properly use now as describing the portions of those events that are past, on the supposition that the reference was to those events? To determine this, it will be proper to refer to the things in the symbol, and to inquire whether events corresponding to them have actually occurred in the Roman empire and the Papacy. Recalling the exposition which has been above given of the explanation furnished by the angel to Daniel, the things there referred to will find an ample and a striking fulfillment in the Roman empire and the Papal power.
(1) The fourth kingdom, symbolized by the fourth beast, is accurately represented by the Roman power. This is true in regard to the place which that power would occupy in the history of the world, on the supposition that the first three referred to the Babylonian, the Medo-Persian, and the Macedonian. On this supposition there is no need of regarding the Medo-Persian empire as divided into two, represented by two symbols; or the kingdom founded by Alexander - the Asiatic-Macedonian - as distinct from that of his successors. As the Medo-Persian was in fact one dominion, so was the Macedonian under Alexander, and in the form of the four dynasties into which it was divided on his death, and down to the time when the whole was subverted by the Roman conquests. On this supposition, also, everything in the symbol is fulfilled. The fourth beast - so mighty, so terrific, so powerful, so unlike all the others, armed with iron teeth, and with claws of brass, trampling down and stamping on all the earth - well represents the Roman dominion.
The symbol is such a one as we should now use appropriately to represent that power, and in every respect that empire was well represented by the symbol. It may be added, also, that this supposition corresponds with the obvious interpretation of the parallel place in Daniel 2:33, Daniel 2:40, where the same empire is referred to in the image by the legs and feet of iron. See the note at that passage. It should be added, that this fourth kingdom is to be considered as prolonged through the entire continuance of the Roman power, in the various forms in which that power has been kept up on the earth - alike under the empire, and when broken up into separate sovereignties, and when again concentrated and embodied under the Papacy. That fourth power or dominion was to be continued, according to the prediction here, until the establishment of the kingdom of the saints. Either, then, that kingdom of the saints has come, or has been set up, or the fourth kingdom, in some form, still remains.
The truth is, that in prophecy the entire Roman dominion seems to be contemplated as one - one mighty and formidable power trampling down the liberties of the world; oppressing and persecuting the people of God - the true church; and maintaining an absolute and arbitrary dominion over the souls of men - as a mighty domination standing in the way of the progress of truth, and keeping back the reign of the saints on the earth. In these respects the Papal dominion is, and has been, but a prolongation, in another form, of the influence of pagan Rome, and the entire domination may be represented as one, and might be symbolized by the fourth beast in the vision of Daniel. When that power shall cease, we may, according to the prophecy, look for the time when the "kingdom shall be given to the saints," or when the true kingdom of God shall be set up all over the world.
(2) Out of this one sovereignty, represented by the fourth beast, ten powers or sovereignties, represented by the ten horns, were to arise. It was shown in the exposition, that these would all spring out of that one dominion, and would wield the power that was wielded by that; that is, that the one great power would be broken up and distributed into the number represented by ten. As the horns all appeared at the same time on the beast, and did not spring up after one another, so these powers would be simultaneous, and would not be a mere succession; and as the horns all sprang from the beast, so these powers would all have the same origin, and be a portion of the same one power now divided into many. The question then is, whether the Roman power was in fact distributed into so many sovereignties at any period such as would be represented by the springing up of the little horn - if that refers to the Papacy. Now, one has only to look into any historical work, to see how in fact the Roman power became distributed and broken up in this way into a large number of kingdoms, or comparatively petty sovereignties, occupying the portions of the world once governed by Rome. In the decline of the empire, and as the new power represented by the "little horn" arose, there was a complete breaking up of the one power that was formerly wielded, and a large number of states and kingdoms sprang out of it.
To see that there is no difficulty in making out the number ten, or that some such distribution and breaking up of the one power is naturally suggested, I cast my eye on the historical chart of Lyman, and found the following kingdoms or sovereignties specified as occupying the same territory which was possessed by the Roman empire, and springing from that - namely, the Vandals, Alans, Suevi, Heruli, Franks, Visigoths, Ostrogoths, Burgundians, Lombards, Britons. The Roman empire as such had ceased, and the power was distributed into a large number of comparatively petty sovereignties - well represented at this period by the ten horns on the head of the beast. Even the Romanists themselves admit that the Roman empire was, by means of the incursions of the northern nations, dismembered into ten kingdoms (Calmet on Revelation 13:1; and he refers likewise to Berengaud, Bossuet, and Dupin. See Newton, p. 209); and Machiaveli (Hist. of Flor. 1. i.), with no design of furnishing an illustration of this prophecy, and probably with no recollection of it, has mentioned these names:
1, the Ostrogoths in Moesia;
2, the Visigoths in Pannonia;
3, the Sueves and Alans in Gascoign and Spain;
4, the Vandals in Africa;
5, the Franks in France;
6, the Burgundians in Burgundy;
7, the Heruli and Turingi in Italy;
8, the Saxons and Angles in Britain;
9, the Huns in Hungary;
10, the Lombards at first upon the Danube, afterward in Italy.
The arrangement proposed by Sir Isaac Newton is the following:
1, The kingdom of the Vandals and Alans in Spain and Africa;
2, the kingdom of the Suevians in Spain;
3, the kingdom of the Visigoths;
4, the kingdom of the Alans in Gallia;
5, the kingdom of the Burgundians;
6, the kingdom of the Franks;
7, the kingdom of the Britons;
- the kingdom of the Huns;
9, the kingdom of the Lombards;
10, the kingdom of Ravenna.
Compare also Duffield on the Prophecies, pp. 279, 280. For other arrangements constituting the number ten, as embracing the ancient power of the Roman empire, see Newton on the Prophecies, pp. 209, 210. There is some slight variation in the arrangements proposed by Mr. Mede, Bishop Lloyd, and Sir Isaac Newton; but still it is remarkable that it is easy to make out that number with so good a degree of certainty, and particularly so, that it should have been suggested by a Romanist himself. Even if it is not practicable to make out the number with strict exactness, or if all writers do not agree in regard to the dynasties constituting the number ten, we should bear in remembrance the fact that these powers arose in the midst of great confusion; that one kingdom arose and another fell in rapid succession; and that there was not that entire certainty of location and boundary which there is in old and established states. One thing is certain, that there never has been a case in which an empire of vast power has been broken up into small sovereignties, to which this description would so well apply as to the rise of the numerous dynasties in the breaking up of the vast Roman power; and another thing is equally certain, that if we were now to seek an appropriate symbol of the mighty Roman power - of its conquests, and of the extent of its dominion, and of the condition of that empire, about the time that the Papacy arose, we could not find a more striking or appropriate symbol than that of the terrible fourth beast with iron teeth and brazen claws - stamping the earth beneath his feet, and with ten horns springing out of his head.
(3) in the midst of these there sprang up a little horn that had remarkable characteristics. The inquiry now is, if this does not represent Antiochus, whether it finds a proper fulfillment in the Papacy. Now, in regard to this inquiry, the slightest acquaintance with the history and claims of the Papal power will show that there was a striking appropriateness in the symbol - such an appropriateness, that if we desired now to find a symbol that would represent this, we could find no one better adapted to it than that employed by Daniel.
(a) The little horn would spring up among the others, and stand among them - as dividing the power with them, or sharing or wielding that power. That is, on the supposition that it refers to the Papacy, the Papal power would spring out of the Roman empire; would be one of the sovereignties among which that vast power would be divided, and share with the other ten in wielding authority. It would be an eleventh power added to the ten. And who can be ignorant that the Papal power at the beginning, when it first asserted civil authority, sustained just such a relation to the crumbled and divided Roman empire as this? It was just one of the powers into which that vast sovereignty passed.
(b) It would not spring up contemporaneously with them, but would arise in their midst, when they already existed. They are seen in vision as actually existing together, and this new power starts up among them. What could be more strikingly descriptive of the Papacy - as a power arising when the great Roman authority was broken to fragments, and distributed into a large number of sovereignties?. Then this new power was seen to rise - small at first, but gradually gaining strength, until it surpassed any one of them in strength, and assumed a position in the world which no one of them had. The representation is exact. It is not a foreign power that invaded them; it starts up in the midst of them - springing out of the head of the same beast, and constituting a part of the same mighty domination that ruled the world.
(c) It would be small at first, but would soon become so powerful as to pluck up and displace three of the others. And could any symbol have been better chosen to describe the Papal power than this? Could we find any now that would better describe it? Any one needs to have but the slightest acquaintance with the history of the Papal power to know that it was small at its beginnings, and that its ascendency over the world was the consequence of slow but steady growth. Indeed, so feeble was it at its commencement, so undefined were its first appearance and form, that one of the most difficult things in history is to know exactly when it did begin, or to determine the exact date of its origin as a distinct power. Different schemes in the interpretation of prophecy turn wholly on this. We see, indeed, that power subsequently strongly marked in its character, and exerting a mighty influence in the world - having subjugated nations to its control; we see causes for a long time at work tending to this, and can trace their gradual operation in producing it, but the exact period when its dominion began, what was the first characteristic act of the Papacy as such, what constituted its precise beginning as a peculiar power blending and combining a peculiar civil and ecclesiastical authority, no one is able with absolute certainty to determine. Who can fix the exact date? Who can tell precisely when it was? It is true that there were several distinct acts, or the exercise of civil authority, in the early history of the Papacy, but what was the precise beginning of that power no one has been able to determine with so much certainty as to leave no room for doubt. Any one can see with what propriety the commencement of such a power would be designated by a little horn springing up among others.
(d) It would grow to be mighty, for the "little horn" thus grew to be so powerful as to pluck up three of the horns of the beast. Of the growth of the power of the Papacy no one can be ignorant who has any acquaintance with history. It held nations in subjection, and claimed and exercised the right of displacing and distributing crowns as it pleased.
(e) It would subdue "three kings;" that is, three of the ten represented by the ten horns. The prophet saw this at some point in its progress when three fell before it, or were overthrown by it. There might have been also other points in its history when it might have been seen as having overthrown more of them - perhaps the whole ten, but the attention was arrested by the fact that, soon after its rise, three of the ten were seen to fall before it. Now, in regard to the application of this, it may be remarked,
(1) That it does not apply, as already shown, to Antiochus Epiphanes - there being no sense in which he overthrew three of the princes that occupied the throne in the succession from Alexander, to say nothing of the fact that these were contemporaneous kings or kingdoms.
(2) there is no other period in history, and there are no other events to which it could be applied except either to Antiochus or the Papacy.
(3) in the confusion that existed on the breaking up of the Roman empire, and the imperfect accounts of the transactions which occurred in the rise of the Papal power, it would not be wonderful if it should be difficult to find events distinctly recorded that would be in all respects an accurate and absolute fulfillment of the vision.
(4) yet it is possible to make out the fulfillment of this with a good degree of certainty in the history of the Papacy. If applicable to the Papal power, what seems to be demanded is, that three of these ten kingdoms, or sovereignties should be rooted up by that power; that they should cease to exist as separate sovereignties; that they should be added to the sovereignty that should spring up; and that, as distinct kingdoms, they should cease to play a part in the history of the world. The three sovereignties thus transplanted, or rooted up, are supposed by Mr. Mede to have been the Greeks, the Longobards, and the Franks. Sir Isaac Newton supposes they were the Exarchate of Ravenna, the Lombards, and the senate and dukedom of Rome. The objections which may be made to these suppositions may be seen in Newton on the Prophecies, pp. 216, 217. The kingdoms which he supposes are to be referred to were the following:
First. The Exarchate of Ravenna. This of right belonged to the Greek emperors. This was the capital of their dominions in Italy. It revolted at the instigation of the Pope, and was seized by Astolphus, king of the Lombards, who thought to make himself master of Italy. The Pope in his exigency applied for aid to Pepin, king of France, who marched into Italy, besieged the Lombards in Pavia, and forced them to surrender the Exarchate and other territories in Italy. These were not restored to the Greek emperor, as they in justice should have been, but, at the solicitation of the Pope, were given to Peter and his successors for perpetual possession. "And so," says Platina, "the name of the Exarchate, which had continued from the time of Narses to the taking of Ravenna, one hundred and seventy years, was extinguished." - Lives of the Popes. This, according to Sigonius, was effected in the year 755. See Gibbon, Dec. and Fall, vol. ii. 224; iii. 332, 334, 338. From this period, says Bp. Newton, the Popes being now become temporal princes, no longer date their epistles and bulls by the years of the emperor's reign, but by the years of their own advancement to the Papal chair.
Secondly. The kingdom of the Lombards. This kingdom was troublesome to the Popes. The dominions of the Pope were invaded by Desiderius, in the time of Pope Adrian I. Application was again made to the king of France, and Charles the Great, the son and successor of Pepin, invaded the Lombards; and desirous of enlarging his own dominions, conquered the Lombards, put an end to their kingdom, and gave a great part of their territory to the Pope. This was the end of the kingdom of the Lombards, in the 206th year after their obtaining possessions in Italy, and in the year of our Lord 774. See Gibbon, Dec. and Fall, vol. iii.335.
Thirdly. The Roman States subjected to the Popes in a civil sense. Though subjected to the Pope spiritually, yet for a long time the Roman people were governed by a senate, and retained many of their old privileges, and elected both the Western Emperors and the Popes. This power, however, as is well known, passed into the hands of the Popes, and has been retained by them to the present time, the Pope having continued to be the civil as well as the ecclesiastical head. See Bp. Newton, pp. 319, 320. All semblance of the freedom of ancient Rome passed away, and this Roman dominion, as such, ceased to be, being completely absorbed in the Papacy. The Saxons, the Franks, etc., continued their independence as civil powers; these states passed entirely into the dominion of the Pope, and as independent kingdoms or sovereignties ceased to be. This is the solution in regard to the "three horns" that were to be plucked up, as given by Bp. Newton. Absolute certainly in a case of this kind is not to be expected in the confusion and indefiniteness of that portion of history, nor can it be reasonably demanded.
If there were three of these powers planted in regions that became subject to the Papal power, and that disappeared or were absorbed in that one dominion constituting the peculiarity of the Papal dominion, or which entered into the Roman Papal state, considered as a sovereignty by itself among the nations of the earth, this is all that is required. Mr. Faber supposes the three to have been these; the Herulo-Turingic, the Ostrogothic, and the Lombardie, and says of them, that they "were necessarily eradicated in the immediate presence of the Papacy, before which they were geographically standing - and that the temporal principality which bears the name of Peter's patrimony, was carved out of the mass of their subjugated dominions." - Sacred Calendar, vol. ii. p. 102. Prof. Gaussen (Discourse on Popery: Geneva, 1844) supposes that the three kings or kingdoms here referred to were the Heruli, the Ostrogoths, and the Lombards. According to Bower (Lives of the Popes, vol. ii. 108, Dr. Cox's edition, note), the temporal dominions granted by Pepin to the Pope, or of which the Pope became possessed in consequence of the intervention of the kings of France, were the following:
(1) The Exarchate of Ravenna, which comprised, according to Sigonius, the following cities: Ravenna, Bologna, Imola, Fienza, Forlimpoli, Forli, Cesena, Bobbio, Ferrara, Commachio. Adria, Servia, and Secchia
(2) The Pentapolis, comprehending Rimini, Pesaro, Coneha, Fano, Sinigalia, Ancono, Osimo, Umono, Jesi, Fossombrone, Monteferetro, Urbino, Cagli, Lucoli, and Eugubio.
(3) the city and dukedom of Rome, containing several cities of note, which had withdrawn themselves from all subjection to the emperor, had submitted to Peter ever since the time of Pope Gregory II. See also Bower, ii. 134, where he says, "The Pope had, by Charlemagne, been put in possession of the Exarchate, the Pentapolis, and the dukedom of Spoleti" (embracing the city and dukedom of Rome). And again, on the same page (note): "The Pope possessed the Exarchate, the Pentapolis, and the dukedom of Spoleti, with the city and dukedom of Rome." It should be remembered that these statements are made by historians with no reference to any supposed fulfillment of this prophecy, and no allusion to it, but as matters of simple historical fact, occurring in the regular course of history. The material fact to be made out in order to show that this description of the "little horn" is applicable to the Papacy is, that at the - commencement of what was properly the Papacy - that is, as I suppose, the union of the spiritual and temporal power, or the assumption, of temporal authority by him who was Bishop of Rome, and who had been before regarded as a mere spiritual or ecclesiastical ruler, there was a triple jurisdiction assumed or conceded, a threefold domination; or a union under himself of what had been three sovereignties, that now disappeared as independent administrations, and whose distinct governments were now merged in the one single sovereignty of the Pope. Now, that there was, just at this time, or at the beginning of the Papacy, or when it had so increased that it could be recognized as having a place among the temporal sovereignties of the earth, such a united domination, or such a union of three separate powers under one, will be apparent from an extract from Mr. Gibbon. He is speaking of the rewards conferred on the Pope by the Carlovingian race of kings, on account of the favor shown to them in his conferring the crown of France on Pepin, the mayor of the palace - directing in his favor over Childeric, the descendant of Clovis. Of this transaction, Mr. Gibbon observes, in general (iii. 336), that "the mutual obligations of the Popes and the Carlovingian family form the important link of ancient and modern, of civil and ecclesiastical history." He then proceeds
(1) to specify the gifts or favors which the Popes conferred on the Carlovingian race; and
(2) those which, in return, Pepin and Charlemagne bestowed on the Popes. In reference to the latter, he makes the following statement (iii.:338): "The gratitude of the Carlovingians was adequate to these obligations, and their names are consecrated as the saviours and benefactors of the Roman church. Her ancient patrimony of farms and houses was transformed by their bounty into the temporal dominion of cities and provinces, and the donation of the Exarchate was the first-fruits of the conquests of Pepin. Astolphus (king of the Lombards) with a sigh relinquished his prey; the keys and the hostages of the principal cities were delivered to the French ambassador; and in his master's name he presented them before the tomb of Peter. The ample measure of the Exarchate might comprise all the provinces of Italy which had obeyed the emperor or his vicegerent; but its strict and proper limits were included in the territories of Ravenna, Bologna, and Ferrara; its inseparable dependency was the Pentapolis, which stretched along the Adriatic from Rimini to Ancona, and advanced into the midland country as far as the ridge of the Apennines. In this transaction, the ambition and avarice of the Popes have been severely condemned.
Perhaps the humility of a Christian priest should have rejected an earthly kingdom, which it was not easy for him to govern without renouncing the virtues of his profession. Perhaps a faithful subject, or even a generous enemy, would have been less impatient to divide the spoils of the barbarian; and if the emperor had entrusted Stephen to solicit in his name the restitution of the Exarchate, I will not absolve the Pope from the reproach of treachery and falsehood. But, in the rigid interpretation of the laws, every one may accept, without inquiry, whatever his benefactor may bestow without injustice. The Greek emperor had abdicated or forfeited his right to the Exarctiate; and the sword of Astolphus was broken by the stronger sword of the Carlovingian. It was not in the cause of the Iconoclast that Pepin had exposed his person and army in a double expedition beyond the Alps; he possessed, and he might lawfully alienate his conquests: and to the importunities of the Greeks he piously replied, that no human consideration should tempt him to resume the gift which he had conferred on the Roman pontiff for the remission of his sins and the salvation of his soul.
The splendid donation was granted in supreme and absolute dominion, and the world beheld for the first time a Cristian bishop invested with the prerogatives of a temporal prince, the choice of magistrates, the exercise of justice, the imposition of taxes, and the wealth of the palace of Ravenna. In the dissolution of the Lombard kingdom, the inhabitants of the duchy of Spoleti sought a refuge from the storm, shaved their heads after the Ravenna fashion, declared themselves the servants and subjects of Peter, and completed, by this voluntary surrender, the present circle of the Ecclesiastical State." The following things are apparent from this extract:
(a) That here, according to Mr. Gibbon, was the beginning of the temporal power of the Pope.
(b) That this was properly, in the view above taken, the commencement of the Papacy as a distinct and peculiar dominion.
(c) That in this there was a threefold government, or three temporal sovereignties united under him, and constituting at that time, in the language of Mr. Gibbon, "the present circle of the ecclesiastical state." There was, first, the Exarchate of Ravenna; secondly, the Pentapolis, "which," he says, was its inseparable dependency; and, thirdly, the "duchy of Spoleti," which, he says, "completed the present circle of the ecclesiastical state." This was afterward, Mr. Gibbon goes on to say, greatly "enlarged;" but this was the form in which the Papal power first made its appearance among the temporal sovereignties of Europe. I do not find, indeed, that the kingdom of the Lombards was, as is commonly stated, among the number of the temporal sovereignties that became subject to the authority of the Popes, but I do find that there were three distinct temporal sovereignties that lost their independent existence, and that were united under that one temporal authority - constituting by the union of the spiritual and temporal power that one peculiar kingdom. In Lombardy the power remained in the possession of the kings of the Lombards themselves, until that kingdom was subdued by the arms of Pepin and Charlemagne, and then it became subject to the crown of France, though for a time under the nominal reign of its own kings. See Gibbon, iii. 334, 335, 338. If it should be said, that in the interpretation of this passage respecting the "three horns" that were plucked up, or the three kingdoms that were thus destroyed, it would be proper to look for them among the ten, into which the one great kingdom was divided, and that the three above referred to - the Exarchate of Ravenna, the Pentapolis, and the dukedom of Spoleti and Rome - were not properly of that number, according to the list above given, it is necessary, in reply to this, to advert only to the two main facts in the case:
(1) that the great Roman power was actually divided into a large number of sovereignties that sprang up on its ruins - usually, but not in fact exactly, represented by ten; and
(2) that the Papacy began its career with a conceded dominion over the three territories above referred to - a part, in fact, of the one great dominion constituting the Roman power, and in the same territory. It is a remarkable fact that the popes to this day wear a triple crown - a fact that exists in regard to no other monarchs - as if they had absorbed under themselves three separate and distinct sovereignties; or as if they represented three separate forms of dominion. The sum of what is said in the exposition of these verses may be thus expressed:
(1) That there was originally one great sovereignty represented here by the "fourth beast" - the Roman empire.
(2) that, in fact, as is abundantly confirmed by history, this one great and united power was broken up into a large number of separate and independent sovereignties - most naturally and obviously described by ten, or such as would appear in a prophetic vision to be ten, and such as is actually so represented by historians having no interest in the fulfillment of the prophecy, and no designed reference to what may be symbolized by the "ten horns."
(3) that there was another peculiar and distinct power that sprang out of them, and that grew to be mighty - a power unlike the others, and unlike anything that had before appeared in the world - combining qualities to be found in no other sovereignty - having a peculiar relation at the same time to the one original sovereignty, and to the ten into which that was divided - the prolongation, in an important sense, of the power of the one, and springing up in a peculiar manner among the others - that peculiar ecclesiastical and civil power - the Papacy - well represented by the "little horn."
(4) that, in fact, this one power absorbed into itself three of these sovereignties - annihilating them as independent powers, and combining them into one most peculiar dominion - properly represented by "plucking them up."
(5) that as a proper symbol, or emblem of some such domination, a crown or diadem is still worn, most naturally and obviously suggesting such a threefold absorption of dominion.
(6) that all this is actually prefigured by the symbols employed by the prophet, or that the symbols are such as would be naturally employed on the supposition that these events were designed to be referred to.
(7) and that there have been no other historical events to which these remarkable symbols could be naturally and obviously applied. And if these things are so, how are they to be explained except on the supposition that Daniel was inspired? Has man any natural sagacity by which such symbols representing the future could be suggested?
(d) It would be arrogant and proud, "speaking great words against the Most High." No Protestant will doubt that this is true of the Papacy; no one acquainted with history will presume to call it in question. The arrogant pretensions of the Papacy have been manifested in all the history of that power, and no one can doubt that its assumptions have been, in fact, by fair construction, "a speaking of great words against God." The Pope has claimed, or allowed to be conferred on him, names and prerogatives which can belong only to God. See this fully shown in the notes at 2 Thessalonians 2:4. The facts there referred to are all that is necessary to illustrate this passage, on the supposition that it refers to the Papacy. Compare also the Literalist, vol. i. pp. 24-27.
(e) This would be a persecuting power - "making war with the saints," and "wearing out the saints of the Most High." Can anyone doubt that this is true of the Papacy? The Inquisition; the "persecutions of the Waldenses;" the ravages of the Duke of Alva; the fires of Smithfield; the tortures at Goa - indeed, the whole history of the Papacy may be appealed to in proof that this is applicable to that power. If anything could have "worn out the saints of the Most High" - could have cut them off from the earth so that evangelical religion would have become extinct, it would have been the persecutions of the Papal power. In the year 1208, a crusade was proclaimed by Pope Innocent III against the Waldenses and Albigenses, in which a million of men perished. From the beginning of the order of the Jesuits, in the year 1540 to 1580, nine hundred thousand were destroyed. One hundred and fifty thousand perished by the Inquisition in thirty years. In the Low Countries fifty thousand persons were hanged, beheaded, burned, or buried alive, for the crime of heresy, within the space of thirty-eight years from the edict of Charles V, against the Protestants, to the peace of Chateau Cambresis in 1559. Eighteen thousand suffered by the hands of the executioner, in the space of five years and a half, during the administration of the Duke of Alva. Indeed, the slightest acquaintance with the history of the Papacy, will convince anyone that what is here said of "making war with the saints" Daniel 7:21, and "wearing out the saints of the Most High" Daniel 7:25, is strictly applicable to that power, and will accurately describe its history. There have been, indeed, other persecuting powers, but none to which this language would be so applicable, and none which it would so naturally suggest. In proof of this, it is only necessary to refer to the history of the Papacy, and to what it has done to extirpate those who have professed a different faith. Let anyone recall:
(1) the persecution of the Waldenses;
(2) the acts of the Duke of Alva in the Low Countries;
(3) the persecution in England under Mary;
(4) the Inquisition;
(5) the attempts, too successful, to extinguish all the efforts at reformation in Italy and Spain in the time of Luther and Calvin (see McCrie), and
(6) the attempts to put down the Reformation in Germany and Switzerland - all which were either directly originated or sanctioned by the Papacy, and all for the same end, and he will see no reason to doubt that the language here is strictly applicable to that power, and that there has been no government on earth which would be so naturally suggested by it. - Cunninghame, in the Literalist, i. 27, 28. Indeed, who can number up all that have perished in the Inquisition alone?
(h) It would claim legislative power - "thinking to change times and laws." The original Chaldee here may be rendered, as is done by Gesenius and DeWette, set times, stated times, or festival seasons. The word here, says Gesenius (Lexicon), is "spoken of sacred seasons, festivals," and there can be no doubt that in this place it refers to religious institutions. The meaning is, that he would claim control over such institutions or festivals, and that he would appoint or change them at his pleasure. He would abolish or modify existing institutions of that kind, or he would institute new ones, as should seem good to him. This would be applicable, then, to some power that should claim authority to prescribe religious institutions, and to change the laws of God. No one, also, can fail to see a fulfillment of this in the claims of the Papacy, in setting up a jurisdiction over seasons of festival and fast; and in demanding that the laws of kingdoms should be so modelled as to sustain its claims, and modifying the laws of God as revealed in the Bible. The right of deposing and setting up kings; of fixing the boundaries of nations; of giving away crowns and scepters; and of exercising dominion over the sacred seasons, the customs, the amusements of nations - all these, as illustrated under the Papacy, will leave no doubt that all this would find an ample fulfillment in the history of that power. The Pope has claimed to be the head of the church, and has asserted and exercised the right of appointing sacred seasons; of abolishing ancient institutions; of introducing numberless new festival occasions, practically abrogating the laws of God on a great variety of subjects. We need only refer, in illustration of this,
(a) to the claim of infallibility, by which an absolute jurisdiction is asserted that covers the whole ground;
(b) to all the laws pertaining to image-worship, so directly in the face of the laws of God;
(c) to the celibacy of the clergy, rendering void one of the laws of heaven in relation to marriage;
(d) to the whole doctrine respecting purgatory;
(e) to the doctrine of transubstantiation;
(f) to the practical abolition of the Christian Sabbath by appointing numerous saints' days to be observed as equally sacred;
(g) to the law withholding the cup from the laity - contrary to the commandment of the Saviour; and
(h) in general to the absolute control claimed by the Papacy over the whole subject of religion.
Indeed, nothing would better characterize this power than to say that it asserted the right to "change times and laws." And to all this should be added another characteristic Daniel 7:8, that "it would have the eyes of a man;" that is, would be distinguished for a far-seeing sagacity. Could this be so appropriately applied to anything else as to the deep, the artful, and the far-reaching diplomacy of the court of Rome; to the sagacity of the Jesuit; to the skillful policy which subdued the world to itself?
These illustrations will leave no doubt, it seems to me, that all that is here said will find an ample fulfillment in the Papacy, and that it is to be regarded as having a reference to that power. If so, it only remains,
III. To inquire what, according to his interpretation, we are to expect will yet occur, or what light this passage throws on events that are yet future. The origin, the growth, the general character and influence of this power up to a distant period are illustrated by this interpretation. What remains is the inquiry, from the passage before us, how long this is to continue, and what we are to anticipate in regard to its fall. The following points, then, would seem to be clear, on the supposition that this refers to the Papal power:
It is to continue a definite period from its establishment, Daniel 7:25. This duration is mentioned as "a time, and times, and the dividing of a time" - three years and a half - twelve hundred and sixty days - twelve hundred and sixty years. See the note at that verse. The only difficulty in regard to this, if that interpretation is correct, is to determine the time when the Papacy actually began - the terminus a quo - and this has given rise to all the diversity of explanation among Protestants. Assuming any one time as the period when the Papal power arose, as a date from which to calculate, it is easy to compute from that date, and to fix some period - terminus ad quem - to which this refers, and which may be looked to as the time of the overthrow of that power. But there is nothing more difficult in history than the determination of the exact time when the Papacy properly began: that is, when the peculiar domination which is fairly understood by that system commenced in the world; or what were its first distinguishing acts. History has not so marked that period that there is no room for doubt. It has not affixed definite dates to it; and to this day it is not easy to make out the time when that power commenced, or to designate any one event at a certain period that will surely mark it. It seems to have been a gradual growth, and its commencement has not been so definitely characterized as to enable us to demonstrate with absolute certainty the time to which the twelve hundred and sixty years will extend.
Different writers have assigned different periods for the rise of the Papacy, and different acts as the first act of that power; and all the prophecies as to its termination depend on the period which is fixed on as the time of its rise. It is this which has led to so much that is conjectural, and which has been the occasion of so much disappointment, and which throws so much obscurity now over all calculations as to the termination of that power. In nothing is the Scripture more clear than that that power shall be destroyed; and if we could ascertain with exactness the date of its origin, there would be little danger of erring in regard to its close. The different periods which have been fixed on as the date of its rise have been principally the following:
(1) An edict published by Justinian (533 a.d.), and a letter addressed by him at the same time to the Pope, in which he acknowledged him to be the head of the churches, thus conferring on him a title belonging only to the Saviour, and putting himself and empire under the dominion of the bishop of Rome. - Duffield on the Prophecies, p. 281.
(2) The decree of the emperor Phocas (606 a.d.), confirming what had been done by Justinian, and giving his sanction to the code of laws promulgated by him; a code of laws based on the acknowledged supremacy of the Pope, and which became the basis of European legislation for centuries; and conferring on him the title of "Universal Bishop."
(3) The act of Pope Stephen, by which, when appealed to by the claimant to the crown of France, he confirmed Pepin in the kingdom, and set aside Childeric III, and, in return, received from Pepin the Exarchate of Ravenna and the Pentapolis. See Ranke's Hist. of the Papacy, vol. i. 23. This occurred about 752 a.d.
(4) The opinion of Mr. Gibbon (4:363), that Gregory VII was the true founder of the Papal power. "Gregory VII.," says he, "who may be adored or detested as the founder of the Papal monarchy, was driven from Rome, and died in exile at Salerno." Gregory became Pope 1073 a.d. These different dates, if assumed as the foundation of the Papal power, would, by the addition to each of the period of 1260 years, lead respectively to the years 1793, 1866, 2012, and 2333, as the period of the termination of the Papal dominion. As this is a point of great importance in the explanation of the prophecies, it may be proper to examine these opinions a little more in detail. But in order to this, it is necessary to have a clear conception of what the Papacy as a distinct domination is, or what constitutes its peculiarity, as seen by the sacred writers, and as it has in fact existed, and does exist in the world; and in regard to this there can be little difference of opinion.
It is not a mere ecclesiastical power - not a mere spiritual domination - not the control of a bishop as such over a church or a diocese - nor is it a mere temporal dominion, but it is manifestly the union of the two: that peculiar domination which the bishop of Rome has claimed, as growing out of his primacy as the head of the church, and of a temporal power also, asserted at first over a limited jurisdiction, but ultimately, and as a natural consequence, over all other sovereignties, and claiming universal dominion. We shall not find the Papacy, or the Papal dominion as such, clearly, in the mere spiritual rule of the first bishop of Rome, nor in that mere spiritual dominion, however enlarged, but in that junction of the two, when, in virtue of a pretended Divine right, a temporal dominion grew up that ultimately extended itself over Europe, claiming the authority to dispose of crowns; to lay kingdoms under interdict, and to absolve subjects from their allegiance. If we can find the beginning of this claim - the germ of this peculiar kind of domination - we shall doubtless have found the commencement of the Papacy - the terminus a quo - as it was seen by the prophets - the point from which we are to reckon in determining the question of its duration.
With this view, then, of the nature of the Papacy, it is proper to inquire when it commenced, or which of the periods referred to, if either, can be properly regarded as the commencement.
I. The edict of Justinian, and the letter to the bishop of Rome, in which he acknowledged him to be the head of the church, 533 a.d. This occurred under John II, reckoned as the fifty-fifth bishop of Rome. The nature of this application of Justinian to the Pope, and the honor conferred on him, was this: On all occasion of a controversy in the church, on the question whether "one person of the Trinity suffered in the flesh," the monks of Constantinople, fearful of being condemned under an edict of Justinian for heresy in denying this, applied to the Pope to decide the point. Justinian, who took great delight in inquiries of that nature, and who maintained the opposite opinion on that subject, also made his appeal to the Pope. Having, therefore, drawn up a long creed, containing the disputed article among the rest, he despatched two bishops with it to Rome, and laid the whole matter before the Pope. At the same time he wrote a letter to the Pope, congratulating him on his election, assuring him that the faith contained in the confession which he sent him was the faith of the whole Eastern church, and entreating him to declare in his answer that he received to his communion all who professed that faith, and none who did not. To add weight to the letter he accompanied it with a present to Peter, consisting of several chalices and other vessels of gold, enriched with precious stones. From this deference to the Pope, on the part of the emperor, and this submitting to him, as the head of the whole church, of an important question to be determined, it has been argued that this was properly the beginning of the Papacy, and that the twelve hundred and sixty years are to be reckoned from that. But against this opinion the objections are insuperable, for
(a) there was here nothing of what properly constitutes the Papacy - the peculiar union of the temporal and spiritual power; or the peculiar domination which that power has exerted over the world. All that occurred was the mere deference which an emperor showed to one who claimed to be the spiritual head of the church, and who had long before claimed that. There was no change - no beginning, properly so called - no commencement of a new form of domination over mankind, such as the Papacy has been.
(b) But, as a matter of fact, there was, after all, little real deference to the Pope in this case. "Little or no account," says Bower, "ought to be made of that extraordinary deference (the deference shown by carrying this question before the Pope). Justinian paid great deference to the Pope, as well as to all other bishops, when they agreed with him; but none at all when they did not - thinking himself at least as well qualified as the best of them - and so he certainly was - to decide controversies concerning the faith; and we shall soon see him entering the lists with his holiness himself" - Lives of the Popes, i.336.
II. The second date which has been assigned to the origin of the Papacy is the decree made by the emperor Phocas (606 a.d.), by which, it is said, he continued the grant made by Justinian. This act was the following: Boniface III, when he had been made bishop of Rome, relying on the favor and partiality which Phocas had shown him, prevailed on him to revoke the decree settling the title of "Universal Bishop" on the bishop of Constantinople, and obtained another settling that title on himself and his successors. The decree of Phocas, conferring this title, has not indeed come down to us; but it has been the common testimony of historians that such title was conferred. See Mosheim, i. 513; Bower, i. 426. The fact asserted here has been doubted, and Mosheim supposes that it rests on the authority of Baronius. "Still," says he, "it is certain that something of this kind occurred." But there are serious objections to our regarding this as properly the commencement of the Papacy as such. For
(a) this was not the beginning of that peculiar domination, or form of power, which the Pope has asserted and maintained. If this title were conferred, it imparted no new power; it did not change the nature of this domination; it did not, in fact, make the Roman bishop different from what he was before. He was still, in all respects, subject to the civil power of the emperors, and had no control beyond what he exercised in the church.
(b) And even this little was withdrawn by the same authority which granted it - the authority of the emperor of Constantinople - though it has always since been claimed and asserted by the Pope himself. See Bower, i. 427. It is true that, as a consequence of the fact that this title was conferred on the Popes, they began to grasp at power, and aspire to temporal dominion; but still there was no formal grasp of such power growing out of the assumption of this title, nor was any such temporal dominion set up as the immediate result of such a title. The act, therefore, was not sufficiently marked, distinct, and decisive, to constitute an epoch, or the beginning of an era, in the history of the world, and the rise of the Papacy cannot with any propriety be dated from that. This was undoubtedly one of the steps by which that peculiar power rose to its greatness, or which contributed to lay the foundation of its subsequent claims, its arrogance, and its pride; but it is doubtful whether it was so important an event characterizing the Papacy as to be regarded as the origin, or the terminus a quo in ascertaining the time of its continuance.
It was, however, in view of this, and with this considered as properly the origin of the Papacy, that the Rev. Robert Fleming, in his work on the Rise and Fall of the Papacy, first published in 1701, uttered the following remarkable language, as based on his calculations respecting the continuance of that power: "If we may suppose that Antichrist began his reign in the year 606, the additional one thousand two hundred and sixty years of his duration, were they Julian or ordinary years, would lead down to the year 1866, as the last period of the seven-headed monster. But seeing they are prophetic years only (of 360 days), we must cast away eighteen years in order to bring them to the exact measure of time that the Spirit of God designs in this book. And thus the final period of the Papal usurpati (supposing that he did indeed rise in the year 606) must conclude with the year 1848 - (Cobbin's Edition, p. 32.) Whether this be considered as merely a happy conjecture - the one successful one among thousands that have failed, or as the result of a proper calculation respecting the future, no one in comparing it with the events of the year 1848, when the Pope was driven from Rome, and when a popular government was established in the very seat of the Papal power, can fail to see that it is remarkable considered as having been uttered a century and a half ago. Whether it is the correct calculation, and that temporary downfall of the Papal government is to be regarded as the first in a series of events that will ultimately end in its destruction, time must determine. The reasons mentioned above, however, and those which will be suggested in favor of a different beginning of that power, make it, at present, more probable that a different period is to be assigned as its close.
III. The third date which has been assigned as the beginning of the Papacy is the grant of Pepin above referred to, 752 a.d. This grant conferred by Pepin was confirmed also by Charlemagne and his successors, and it was undoubtedly at this period that the Papacy began to assume its place among the sovereignties of Europe. In favor of this opinion - that this was properly the rise of the Papacy - the terminus a quo of prophecy, the following considerations may be urged:
(a) We have here a definite act - an act which is palpable and apparent, as characterizing the progress of this domination over men.
(b) We have here properly the beginning of the temporal dominion, or the first acknowledged exercise of that power in acts of temporal sovereignty - in giving laws, asserting dominion, swaying a temporal scepter, and wearing a temporal crown. All the acts before had been of a spiritual character, and all the deference to the Bishop of Rome had been of a spiritual nature. Henceforward, however, he was acknowledged as a temporal prince, and took his place as such among the crowned heads of Europe.
(c) This is properly the beginning of that mighty domination which the Pope wielded over Europe - a beginning, which, however small at first, ultimately became so powerful and so arrogant as to claim jurisdiction over all the kingdoms of the earth, and the right to absolve subjects from their allegiance, to lay kingdoms under interdict, to dispose of crowns, to order the succession of princes, to tax all people, and to dispose of all newly-discovered countries.
(d) This accords better with the prophecies than any other one event which has occurred in the world - especially with the prophecy of Daniel, of the springing up of the little horn, and the fact that that little horn plucked up three others of the ten into which the fourth kingdom was divided.
(e) And it should be added that this agrees with the idea all along held up in the prophecies, that this would be properly the fourth empire prolonged. The fifth empire or kingdom is to be the reign of the saints, or the reign of righteousness on the earth; the fourth extends down in its influences and power to that. As a matter of fact, this Roman power was thus concentrated in the Papacy. The form was changed, but it was the Roman power that was in the eye of the prophets, and this was contemplated under its various phases, as pagan and nominally Christian, until the reign of the saints should commence, or the kingdom of God should be set up. But it was only in the time of Stephen, and by the act of Pepin and Charlemagne, that this change occurred, or that this dominion of a temporal character was settled in the Papacy - and that the Pope was acknowledged as having this temporal power. This was consummated indeed in Hildebrand, or Gregory VII (Gibbon, iii. 353, iv. 363), but this mighty power properly had its origin in the time of Pepin.
IV. The fourth date assigned for the origin of the Papacy is the time of Hildebrand, or Gregory VII. This is the period assigned by Mr. Gibbon. Respecting this, he remarks (vol. iv. p. 363), "Gregory the Seventh, who may be adored or detested as the founder of the Papal monarchy, was driven from Rome, and died in exile at Salerno." And again (vol. iii. p. 353), he says of Gregory, "After a long series of scandal, the apostolic see was reformed and exalted, by the austerity and zeal of Gregory VII. That ambitious monk devoted his life to the execution of two projects:
I. To fix in the college of Cardinals the freedom and independence of election, and forever to abolish the right or usurpation of the emperors and the Roman people.
II. To bestow and resume the Western Empire as a fief or benefice of the church, and to extend his temporal dominion over the kings and kingdoms of the earth.
After a contest of fifty years, the first of these designs was accomplished by the firm support of the ecclesiastical order, whose liberty was connected with that of the chief. But the second attempt, though it was crowned with some apparent and partial success, has been vigorously resisted by the secular power, and finally extinguished by the improvement of human reason."
If the views above suggested, however, are correct; or if we look at the Papacy as it was in the time of Hildebrand, it must be apparent that this was not the rise or origin of that peculiar domination, but was only the carrying out and completing of the plan laid long before to set up a temporal dominion over mankind.
It should be added, whatever of the three first periods referred to be regarded as the time of the rise of the Papacy, if we add to them the prophetic period of 1260 years, we are now in the midst of scenes on which the prophetic eye rested, and we cannot, as fair interpreters of prophecy, but regard this mighty domination as hastening to its fall. It would seem probable, then, that according to the most obvious explanation of the subject, we are at present not far from the termination and fall of that great power, and that events may be expected to occur at about this period of the world, which will be connected with its fall.
Its power is to be taken away as by a solemn judgment - if the throne was set, and God was to come forth to pronounce judgment on this power to overthrow it, Daniel 7:10-11, Daniel 7:26. This destruction of the power referred to is to be absolute and entire - as if the "beast were slain, and the body given to the burning flame" - "and they shall take away his dominion, to consume and destroy it unto the end." This would denote the absolute destruction of this peculiar power - its entire cessation in the world; that is, the absolute destruction of what had constituted its peculiarity - the prolonged power of the beast of the fourth kingdom - concentrated and embodied in that represented by the little horn. If applied to the Roman power, or the fourth kingdom, it means that that power which would have been prolonged under the dominion of that represented by the little horn, would wholly cease - as if the body of the beast had been burned.
If applied to the power represented by the "little horn" - the Papacy - it means that that power which sprang up amidst the others, and which became so mighty - embodying so much of the power of the beast, would wholly pass away as an ecclesiastico-civil power. It would cease its dominion, and as one of the ruling powers of the earth would disappear. This would be accomplished by some remarkable Divine manifestation - as if God should come in majesty and power to judgment and should pronounce a sentence; that is, the overthrow would be decisive, and as manifestly the result of the Divine interposition as if God should do it by a formal act of judgment. In the overthrow of that power, whenever it occurs, it would be natural, from this prophecy, to anticipate that there would be some scenes of commotion and revolution bearing directly on it, as if God were pronouncing sentence on it; some important changes in the nations that had acknowledged its authority, as if the great Judge of nations were coming forth to assert his own power and his own right to rule, and to dispose of the kingdoms of the earth as he pleased.
(C) It is to be anticipated that the power referred to will be destroyed on account of its pride and arrogance. See the notes at Daniel 7:11. That is, whatever power there is upon the earth at the time referred to that shall be properly that of the fourth beast or kingdom, will be taken away on account of the claims set up and maintained by the "little horn:" "I beheld because of the voice of the great words which the horn spake; I beheld until the beast was slain, etc.," Daniel 7:11. On the supposition that this refers to the Papacy, what is to be expected would be, that the pride and arrogance of that power as such - that is, as an ecclesiastical power claiming dominion over civil things, and wielding civil authority, would be such that the Roman power - the lingering power of the fourth kingdom - would be taken away, and its dominion over the world would cease. That vast Roman domination that once trod down the earth, and that crushed and oppressed the nations, would still linger, like the prolonged life of the beast, until, on account of the arrogance and pride of the Papacy, it would be wholly taken away. If one were to judge of the meaning of this prophecy without attempting to apply it to particular passing events, he would say that it would be fulfilled by some such events as these: if the people over whom the prolonged Roman civil power would be extended, and over whom the ecclesiastical or papal scepter would be swayed, should, on account of the pride and arrogance of the Papacy, rise in their might, and demand liberty - that would be in fact an end of the prolonged power of the fourth beast; and it would be on account of the "great words which the horn spake," and would be in all respects a fulfillment of the language of this prophecy. Whether such an end of this power is to occur, time is to determine.
(D) Simultaneously with this event, as the result of this, we are to anticipate such a spread of truth and righteousness, and such a reign of the saints on the earth, as would be properly symbolized by the coming of the Son of man to the ancient of days to receive the kingdom, Daniel 7:13-14. As shown in the interpretation of those verses, this does not necessarily imply that there would be any visible appearing of the Son of man, or any personal reign (see the note at these verses), but there would be such a making over of the kingdom to the Son of man and to the saints as would be properly symbolized by such a representation. That is, there would be great changes; there would be a rapid progress of the truth; there would be a spread of the gospel; there would be a change in the governments of the world, so that the power would pass into the hands of the righteous, and they would in fact rule. From that time the "saints" would receive the kingdom, and the affairs of the world would be put on a new footing. From that period it might be said that the reign of the saints would commence; that is, there would be such changes in this respect that that would constitute an epoch in the history of the world - the proper beginning of the reign of the saints on the earth - the setting up of the new and final dominion in the world. If there should be such changes - such marked progress - such facilities for the spread of truth - such new methods of propagating it - and such certain success attending it, all opposition giving way, and persecution ceasing, as would properly constitute an epoch or era in the world's history, which would be connected with the conversion of the world to God, this would fairly meet the interpretation of this prophecy; this occurring, all would have taken place which could be fairly shown to be implied in the vision.
(E) We are to expect a reign of righteousness on the earth. On the character of what we are fairly to expect from the words of the prophecy, see the notes at Daniel 7:14. The prophecy authorizes us to anticipate a time when there shall be a general prevalence of true religion; when the power in the world shall be in the hands of good men - of men fearing God; when the Divine laws shall be obeyed - being acknowledged as the laws that are to control men; when the civil institutions of the world shall be pervaded by religion, and moulded by it; when there shall be no hinderance to the free exercise of religion, and when in fact the reigning power on the earth shall be the kingdom which the Messiah shall set up. There is nothing more certain in the future than such a period, and to that all things are tending. Such a period would fulfill all that is fairly implied in this wonderful prophecy, and to that faith and hope should calmly and confidently look forward. For that they who love their God and their race should labor and pray; and by the certain assurance that such a period will come, we should be cheered amidst all the moral darkness that exists in the world, and in all that now discourages us in our endeavors to do good.
I. この章の分析
本章には、ベルシャザルの治世第一年にダニエルが見た注目すべき預言的夢と、その夢の解釈とが記されている。本章の内容を簡潔に述べた後、より明瞭に説明するために、この章を解釈するために提案されてきたさまざまな方法、すなわちその適用について採用されてきたさまざまな見解を提示しておくのが適切であろう。本章は次の主要な点から成る。すなわち、幻 (Daniel 7:1-14)、およびその説明 (Daniel 7:15-28) である。
I. 幻 (Daniel 7:1-14)。この夢はベルシャザルの治世第一年に起こり、直ちに書き記された。ダニエルは海のほとりに立っており、激しい風が海の上に吹き荒れ、波を猛烈に掻き乱している。突然、彼はかき乱れた波の中から四つの怪物が現れ出るのを見る。それぞれはしばらくとどまるかと思うと、やがて消え去る。第一の獣は、その全体の姿形においてライオンに似ていたが、鷲のような翼を持っていた。ダニエルがそれを注意深く見つめているうちに、翼は抜き取られ、その獣は人のように直立させられ、人の心が与えられた。
この獣がその後どうなったかについては、何も述べられていない。次に第二の獣が現れたが、熊に似ており、体の一方の側を起こして立ち、口には三本の肋骨をくわえており、起きて多くの肉を食らえと命じられた。この獣がその後どうなったかについても、それ以上は何も語られていない。次に、四つの翼と四つの頭を持つ豹のような別の獣が立ち上がり、この獣には広い支配権が与えられた。この獣がどうなったかについても何も言及されない。次に、さらにいっそう注目すべき第四の獣が立ち上がった。その姿形は述べられていないが、猛烈で強力であった。それは大きな鉄の歯を持ち、あらゆるものを踏みにじり、食らい、粉々に砕いた。この獣には初め十の角があったが、まもなくその中から別の角が生え出た。初めのうちは小さな角であったが、これが大きくなるにつれて、十の角のうち三つが根こそぎ抜かれた——この小さな角によって抜かれたか、あるいはこの角に場所を譲るために抜かれたかの、いずれかであったらしい。さらに注目すべきことに、この小さな角には人の目があった——知性と警戒の象徴である。また、大いなることを語る口があった——高ぶりと傲慢とを示すものである。ダニエルは、王座が設けられ、日の老いたる方が座に着かれるまで——すなわち古い支配の形態が終わり、神の支配が導入され、確立されるまで——この奇妙な幻を見続けた。「角が語った」大いなる言葉のゆえに獣が殺され、その体が滅ぼされて燃える炎に渡されるまで、彼はそれを見つめていた。その間、他の獣たちからは支配権が取り去られたが、彼らの存在はしばらく延長された。次に、幻の中に人の姿をした方が現れ、日の老いたる方のところに来られ、すべての民を治べる普遍的な支配権と、決して滅ぼされることのない王国とが彼に与えられた。
II. 幻の解釈 (Daniel 7:15-28)。ダニエルは自分の見た幻にひどく悩み、そばに立っている者のところに近づいて、その意味を尋ねた (Daniel 7:15-16)。彼が受けた恵みの説明は、概ね次のようなものであった。すなわち、彼の見た四つの獣は、地上に存在することになる四人の王、ないし四つの王国を表し、この幻の大いなる目的は、いと高き方の聖徒たちがついに王国を所有し、永遠に支配することになるという事実を明らかにすることにあった (Daniel 7:17-18)。この幻の偉大な目的は、諸王朝の継承と、それぞれの王朝の個性的な性格とを描き、世界に対する支配が神の民の手に移り、地上における実際の統治が義人の手に委ねられるまでを示すことにあった。すべての変革が向かい、かつこの幻において示すことが意図されていた究極の目的は、聖徒たちがついに地上で支配することであった。天の下にあるすべての王国が、いと高き方の聖徒たちの民に与えられる時が来るはずであった。言い換えれば、「すべての支配権」、あるいはすべての「支配者たち」(Daniel 7:27 欄外注) が彼に従うような状態が、地上に生じるということである。この、究極的に目指された事柄と、最初の三つの獣によって表された最初の三つの王国とに関するこの一般的な告知は、ダニエルを満足させた。しかし、その構造がこれほど著しく、他のすべての獣とこれほど異なり、これほど驚くべき変貌を遂げた第四の獣が具体的に何を表すよう意図されているのかについては、彼はなお当惑していた (Daniel 7:19-22)。第四の獣によって表された事柄に関して彼に述べられた内容の要点は、次のとおりである。
(1)これは、多くの点において、それに先立つ三つの王国と異なる、地上に起こる第四の王国ないし王朝を表すよう意図されたものである。それは、圧制的な征服によって際立つ王国となるはずであった。それは全地を征服し、侵攻した者たちを打ち砕き、打ち倒し、踏みにじるであろう。この描写が特徴づけるのは、冷酷で、強大で、残虐で、成功を収める支配であり、征服した諸国民を、公正な法の運営によってではなく、武器の恐怖によって支配の下に保つような支配である (Daniel 7:23)。
(2)ダニエルがその頭から生え出るのを見た十の角は、起こることになる十人の王、ないし王国の権威を次々に行使することになる支配者たちの系列を表した (Daniel 7:24)。
(3)十の角の中に、それらの後に生え出たもう一本の角は、起こることになるもう一つの王朝を表し、この王朝には独特の特徴があるはずであった。それは、彼らの中から生え出るという点で、彼らとある程度のつながりを持つことになる。しかし最も重要な点においては、彼らと異なることになる。その特徴は、次のように要約することができる。
(a)それは彼らのただ中から生え出る、あるいは何らかの仕方で彼らに付着し、結びつくことになる——角が獣の頭から生え出たように。そしてこれは、新しい勢力が、第四の獣によって表された王朝から何らかの仕方で生じたことを、適切に示すことになる——角がその獣の頭から生え出たように。
(b)そこから生え出るとはいえ、それはそれとは「異なる」ものとなり、その性格は、その起源という単なる事実からではなく、何か別のものによって決定されることになる。
(c)それは「これらの王たちのうち三人を打ち倒す」ことになる。すなわち、十の角によって表された力と権威のうちの一定の部分を征服し、打ち倒すことになる。おそらくは、第四の獣によって表された王国の力のほぼ三分の一を簒奪することを意味するのであろう。
(d)それは横柄さと高慢さとを特徴とする。その主張を公正に解釈すれば、「いと高き方に逆らって語る」という程度に達するほどである。
(e)それは「いと高き方の聖徒たちを悩ませる」ことになる。これは明らかに迫害を指している。
(f)それは「時と律法を変えようとする」ほどの立法権を主張することになる。これは、確立された諸法の上に立てられる何らかの主張、あるいは並外れた権威を明らかに指している (Daniel 7:24-25)。
(4)これらのことはすべて、「一時と二時と半時」の間、この新しい勢力の手に委ねられることになる。これは、それが永続するのではなく、終わりを迎えることを含意している (Daniel 7:25)。
(5)その後、さばきがあることになる——この新しい勢力に関する司法的決定であり、その支配権は取り去られ、完全に滅ぼし尽くされる (Daniel 7:26)。
(6)地上のすべての支配権が聖徒たちの手に移る時代が来る。言い換えれば、真理と義の諸原則による普遍的な統治が実現するということである (Daniel 7:27)。
本章の結論 (Daniel 7:28) において、ダニエルは、これらの啓示が自分の心に深い影響を与えたと述べている。彼は、遠い未来をずっと眺め、人間の営みの推移における膨大な変化を熟考し、さらには、すべての国民が神の律法の支配下にもたらされ、いと高き方の友たちがすべての権力を手中に収める時代を先取りして見ることを許された。このような出来事は心を厳粛な思いで満たすのに十分であり、彼が深い感慨をもってそれらを熟考したとしても、不思議ではない。
II. この章を解釈する諸方法
この章を解釈する方法には非常に異なるものが数多くあり、その適切な解釈についての見解が注解者たちの間で決して一致していないことは、ほとんど言うを要しない。注解に進む前にそれらの方法のいくつかに言及しておき、本章を考察するにあたってそれらが念頭に置かれるようにすることは、有益であるかもしれない。それらのうちの一つでも、聖なる著者が用いた言葉の公正な解説と一致するものがあるかどうかを吟味することによって、真の解釈が何であるかをよりよく確定することができるようになる。抱かれてきた意見は、次の諸類型に帰着させることができる。
I. ハルトは、ここの四つの獣が、ネブカデネザル、エビル・メロダク、ベルシャザル、クロという特定の四人の王を指すと考える。
II. アイヒホルンが従うエフレムは、第一の獣はバビロン・カルデア王国を指すと考える。第二は、キュアクサレス二世の下のメディア帝国であり、その三本の「肋骨」は、その帝国のメディア、ペルシャ、カルデアの各部分を表す。第三はペルシャ帝国であり、その四つの頭と翼は、ペルシャ帝国が天の下の四方へ、すなわち世界のすべての地域へと広がったことを表す。第四は、アレクサンドロスとその後継者たちの下のギリシャ帝国であり、その十の角はアレクサンドロスの後継者たちのうちの十人の著名な王を、彼らの中に生え出た「小さな角」はアンティオコス・エピファネスを表す。エフレムとアイヒホルンによれば、それに続く事態は、メシアの王国を指す。
III. ヘッツェルが従う、もう一つの類型の注解者たちを代表するグロティウスは、ここで言及されている王国の継承を、バビロン・カルデア、ペルシャ、アレクサンドロスとその後継者たちの王国であると見なす。第五はローマ帝国である。
IV. 教会において最も広く行き渡ってきた解釈は、第一の獣がカルデア王国を、第二がメディア・ペルシャを、第三がアレクサンドロスとその後継者たちの下のギリシャ帝国を、第四がローマ帝国を表すとするものである。聖徒たちの支配とは、メシアとその諸律法の統治のことである。しかしこの見解は、特にこれらの王国の第四と第五に関して、とりわけ十の角と、その中に生え出た小さな角の意義に関して、実に多様に修正されてきた。第五の王国をキリストの統治に関係づける人々の中には、第四の王国をカエサルたちの下のローマに関係づけ、十の角を十人の摂政たちの継承とし、小さな角をユリウス・カエサルと見なす者たちがいる。最後の帝国を、地上におけるキリストご自身の統治と、彼が樹立することになる王国とに関係づける他の人々は、十の角を、ローマの勢力から生え出た十人の王ないし王朝——歴代皇帝たちの継承、あるいは北方の遊牧民の大群の侵入の後に現れた者たち、あるいはローマの勢力が倒れた後にそれに取って代わったヨーロッパのいくつかの王国——と見なす。そして小さな角については、それが、さまざまな分枝を伴うトルコの勢力、ムハンマド、教皇権、あるいは反キリストのいずれかを指すものと考える。
V. ユダヤ人たちは、概して、第五の王国がメシアの統治を指すと考える。しかしそれでも、預言の個々の部分の適用に関しては、彼らの間でも見解の多様性が非常に大きかった。彼らの中の多くの古い時代の注解者たちは、十の角がローマの十人のカエサルを、最後の角がティトゥス・ウェスパシアヌスを表すと考えていた。後代のユダヤ人注解者たちの大多数は、これを彼らの架空のゴグとマゴグに当てはめる。
VI. 擁護者を持っていたもう一つの解釈は、第一の王国がカルデア、第二がペルシャ、第三がアレクサンドロスの王国、第四がその後継者たちの王国であり、第五が、シリアの王たちの専制政治からユダヤ民族を救い出すために立ち上がったハスモン朝の君主たちの王国であるとするものである。
VII. 教会の中でいくらかの範囲で行き渡った一つの解釈様式の例として、コケイウスの見解を挙げることができる。彼は、鷲の翼を持つ第一の獣が、ローマにおけるキリスト教徒の皇帝たちの統治と、その下でのキリスト教の東西の遠隔地域への広がりを表し、口に三本の肋骨をくわえた第二の獣は、アリウス派のゴート族、ヴァンダル族、ランゴバルド族を、四つの頭と四つの翼を持つ第三の獣は、四つのカリフ国を伴うイスラームの王国を表すと考える。第四の獣はカール大帝の王国を表し、この王国における十の角は、カロリング家、ザクセン、ザーレ、スウェーデン、オランダ、イングランドなどの君主たちと王朝、あるいは諸民族である。そして小さな角は、現実の反キリストである教皇権を表す。
これらのさまざまな意見と解釈方法についての陳述は、私はベルトルトの『ダニエル』419~426頁から翻訳したものである。これに加えるべきは、ベルトルト自身が保持し、他の多くの人々によっても保持されてきた意見であり、ベルトルトは426~446頁でこれを詳しく説明し、擁護している。その意見は、実質的に次のようなものである。第一の王国は、ネブカデネザルの下のバビロン王国であり、第一の獣の翼は、その帝国の広範な広がりを表す。三本の「肋骨」ないし牙を持つ第二の獣は、一つの王権、すなわちペルシャの下に立てられたメディア、リディア、バビロンの諸王国を表す。四つの翼と四つの頭を持つ第三の獣は、アレクサンドロスの下のギリシャ王朝と、その王国の世界の四つの部分への広がりを表す。第四の獣は、ヘブル人がその下でこれほど多くの苦しみを受けたラギドス朝とセレウコス朝の王国を表す。この王国に関して (Daniel 7:7) に「それは、その前にあったすべてのものと異なっていた」とあるのは、「第四の王国の複数性」、すなわちそれが他の多くの王国から成る集合体であったという事実、集合的な意味における一つの王国であったことを指す。「十の角」は、その王国における十人の継承的な君主ないし王を表し、ベルトルトは彼らを次の順序で数え上げている。
セレウコス・ニカトル
アンティオコス・ソテル
アンティオコス・テオス
セレウコス・カリニコス
セレウコス・ケラウノス
アンティオコス大王
セレウコス・フィロパトル
ヘリオドロス
プトレマイオス・フィロメトル
デメトリオス
小さな角によって示された第十一は、ヘブルの民にこれほど多くの災いをもたらしたアンティオコス・エピファネスであった。彼の統治は、ベルトルトによれば、「一時と二時と半時」——すなわち三年半——の間続いた。その後、王国は神の民に回復されて永続的な統治となり、ついにはメシアの下で世界を満たし、時代の終わりまで存続する。
このように述べられた解釈、すなわち「小さな角」がアンティオコス・エピファネスを指すとする解釈は、スチュアート教授によっても擁護されている——『預言に関する示唆』第2版85~98頁。さらに『ダニエル書注解』173~194頁および205~211頁をも参照されたい。
このような見解の多様性の中にあって、この章の意味に関して何らかの満足すべき結論に到達する唯一の希望は、本文と、ダニエルが用いた象徴の公正な意味とを注意深く検討することにある。